Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). ....
Transcript of Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). ....
![Page 1: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
PurchasingReference Manual
FASPAC 3.5
FPD/203
![Page 2: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
Faspac Systems, Inc.7590 Fay Avenue, Suite 301La Jolla, CA 92037
Confidential and ProprietaryCopyright 1999-2000 Faspac Systems, Inc.All Rights Reserved
This document is the trade secret property of Faspac Systems, Inc. and is protected bycopyright law and international treaties. Its use by you is strictly governed by a licenseagreement. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution may result in severe civil or criminalpenalties.
Trademarks:FASPAC is a trademark of Faspac Systems, Inc. All other trademarks, registeredtrademarks, names, or product names contained in this publication are the property oftheir respective owners, and Faspac Systems, Inc. neither endorses nor otherwisesponsors any such product or services referred to herein.
![Page 3: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vendor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vendor Pricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
F8 - UM Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Warehouse Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Process Requisitions and Vendor Quotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Status Code—Requisitions and Vendor Quotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Create a Requisition/Vendor Quote in Order Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Create a Requisition in Suggested Reorder Report (IM/IMRP/SRR) . . . . . . 15
Process Purchase Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Status Codes—Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Status Codes—Printed Purchase Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Freight Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Set Flags in Purchasing Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Purchase Order (SYS/POS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Vendor Maintenance (AP/MAR/VM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ship From Maintenance (PO/POM/SFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Blanket Purchase Orders (PO/BPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Effects in Other Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Purchase Order Entry (PO/PE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Interactive Create Preliminary P.O. (PO/ICPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Create Preliminary Purchase Orders (PO/CPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Line Maintenance (PO/PL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Header Maintenance (PO/PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Blanket Purchase Orders (PO/BPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Programs Affected by Blanket Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Blanket P.O. Entry/Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Create Blanket P.O. Releases (PO/BPO/BPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Blanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry (PO/BPO/BCN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
FPD/203 PO - 3
![Page 4: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
Blanket P.O. Listing (PO/BPO/BPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Purge Blanket Purchase Orders (PO/BPO/BPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Print (PO/PP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Listing (PO/LIS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Inquiry (PO/INQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
History Maintenance (PO/HM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
History Report (PO/HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Consolidation Companies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Default Fax or Email Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Vendor Listing (PO/VL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes (PO/REQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance (PO/REQ/RQM) . . . . . . . . . 135
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Inquiry (PO/REQ/RQI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Status Codes—Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Status Codes—Printed Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print (PO/REQ/RQP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Listing (PO/REQ/RQL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Delete (PO/REQ/RQD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Inquire By Requisition Number (PO/REQ/RQRR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Requisitions/Vendor Maintenance (PO/REQ/VQM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Miscellaneous (POM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Ship From Maintenance (PO/POM/SFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Default Fax or Email Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Ship From Listing (PO/POM/SFL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Warehouse Address Maintenance (PO/POM/WAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Warehouse Address Inquiry (PO/POM/WAQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Cancel (PO/POM/CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Delete (PO/POM/POD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Vendor Rating Report (PO/POM/VRR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Automated Replenishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Foreign Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Warehouse Control Specifications (SYS/WCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Purchase Product Line Maintenance (IM/PPLM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Vendor Maintenance (AP/MAR/VM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Vendor Order Requirements Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . 199
Inventory Management (IM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Vendor Catalogs and Contracts (VCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
PO - 4 FPD/203
TABLE OF CONTENTS
![Page 5: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
Determining When to Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Replenishment Definition (INV/AUR/AURD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Replenishment Creation (INV/AUR/AURC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Replenishment Review (INV/AUR/AURR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Automatic Replenishment Review Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . 230
Automatic Replenishment Review Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Automatic Replenishment Review TPIM Detail Screen . . . . . . . 236
FPD/203 PO - 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
![Page 6: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
PO - 6 FPD/203
TABLE OF CONTENTS
![Page 7: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
Introduction
The Purchasing module includes programs used to create, process, and track
requisitions, vendor quotes, and purchase orders. Also included in the Purchasing
module are programs used to enter, display, and list vendor information and
warehouse information.
Although both inventory and non-inventory items can be used when working
with purchase orders and requisitions, the Purchasing module is not normally
used until the Inventory Master file has been created in full or in part, since
buying history/tag information is saved only for inventory items. See the
Inventory Conversion Reference Manual and Inventory Management Reference
Manual in Volume 2 for detailed information on creating inventory items and
buying history/tag records.
The F1, F2, F3, and F4 function keys are used throughout the Purchasing module
whenever a vendor or an item must be specified. Use F1 to begin the search
based on the vendor number or the item number entered. Use F2 to begin the
search based on the vendor name or item shortname entered. Use the F3 and F4
function keys to scroll forward and back through the Vendor file or through the
Inventory File. Scrolling is based on the function key that was initially pressed to
begin the search.
There are some terms you should be familiar with when working in the
Purchasing module. See the end of this Introduction for a list of terms and their
definitions.
Before You Begin
Enter the vendors who will be used in the Purchasing programs, in the Vendor
file (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM). These vendors may have been entered previously,
when the Accounts Payable module was put into use. Each vendor to be used in
the Purchasing programs must be flagged in the Vendor file as a PO Vendor. The
vendor address entered in the Vendor file is the remit address. This is the address
which appears on checks printed through the Accounts Payable module. A
purchase order vendor often has more than one ship-from address. Vendor
ship-from addresses can be entered through the Vendor Maintenance program
(PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM) and through the Ship-From Address Maintenance
program (PO/POM/SFM). Entering ship-from addresses will save you time when
entering purchase orders and when displaying or listing purchase information.
See the Vendor Maintenance and Ship-From Maintenance sections (PO/VM,
PO/POM/SFM) for detailed information on entering vendor information in the
Vendor file.
FPD/203 PO - 7
![Page 8: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
Determine which address, if any, is to be printed on your purchase orders and
flag the System File (SYS/POS) appropriately (Y or N in the Print Address On
Purchase Order field). You have the option to print the company address defined
in the System File (SYS/CIS), or the warehouse address defined in the
Warehouse Address File (PO/POM/ WAM), or not to print an address on the
purchase orders at all. This last option should be selected if you use purchase
order forms preprinted with your company name and address.
See the System Maintenance Reference Manual in Volume 5 for additional
information. See the Warehouse Address Maintenance (PO/POM/WAM) section
of the manual for information regarding entering a warehouse address.
Determine whether you want to use valid locations and flag the System File
(SYS/WCS) appropriately. If you decide to use valid locations, each valid
location must be entered in the Valid Stock Location File, through the Stock
Location Maintenance program (TAG/SLM). See the System Maintenance
Reference Manual in Volume 5 and Tagging System Reference Manual in
Volume 2 for additional information.
Determine when you want to print Tag Record Labels. Flag the System File
(SYS/LAI) to reflect your decision. See the System Maintenance Reference
Manual in Volume 5 and Tagging System Reference Manual in Volume 2 for
detailed information on printing Tag Record Labels.
Determine how long you want to be able to access closed/completed requisitions
and purchase orders through the Inquiry programs (PO/INQ, PO/REQ/RQI). Add
the Delete programs (PO/POD, PO/REQ/RQD) to your monthly close
procedures.
Vendor Information
Vendor information is entered and edited through the Vendor Maintenance
program which can be accessed through the Purchasing module and through the
Accounts Payable module (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM). All vendors in the Vendor
file can be used in the Accounts Payable module, but only those flagged as PO
vendors can be used in the Purchasing module. Vendor information for all or a
range of vendors can be printed through the Vendor Listing (PO/VL) and
Ship-From Listing (PO/POM/SFL) programs.
The total value of purchase orders entered for each month is stored in the
Purchase History File (PO/HM). This history information can be displayed,
edited, and printed. See the History Maintenance and History Report (PO/HM,
PO/HR) sections of the manual for detailed information.
PO - 8 FPD/203
INTRODUCTION
![Page 9: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
Vendor Pricing
If Vendor Pricing is used, the Vendor Price codes can be flagged through System
Code Maintenance (SYCD) to automatically update the Vendor Price Table
assigned to the Vendor record (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM). If the Vendor Price code
is flagged to update automatically:
• If there is no record for the item in the Vendor Price Table file for the
Vendor Price code, and there are less than nine existing Vendor Price
Table records for the item, a new record is created using the net cost.
• If there is an existing record for the item in the Vendor Price Table file for
the Vendor Price code used, and the net cost entered is different than the
cost in the Price Table, the cost and date in the existing Vendor Price
Table record are updated.
• If there are already nine existing Vendor Price Table records for the item,
no update is made.
• If the net cost entered for the item is the same as the cost in the Vendor
Price Table (for the specified Vendor code), no update is made.
• If the Vendor Price code is flagged to ask whether or not update, and the
update option is selected, the update procedure listed above takes place.
F8 - UM Conversion
The UM Conversion feature allows you to enter an item using a different unit of
measure than the UOM in IM/MAI. From the Qty field, press F8 to access the
UM Conversion Window and convert the current UOM of an item to a new unit
of measure.
Field Explanation
ORDER
U/M
The stocking unit of this item is displayed. To enter this item in a
different unit, enter the new unit of measure.
FPD/203 PO - 9
F8 - UM CONVERSION
![Page 10: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
QTY
Enter the quantity of this item you are quoting, using the new unit of
measure.
CONVERSION
STOCKING
Using the conversion factor, the system calculates the ordered quantity
(using the new UM) and the stocked quantity (using the standard UOM)
of the item.
The system calculates an approximate conversion factor using the figures
entered in the Box Qty, Case Qty, Bulk Qty, Weight, and Pieces Per UM
fields of the Item Master Record (IM/MAI). You can accept this factor
by pressing RETURN or enter another conversion factor.
Function Keys
F1 - Start Again
Returns the cursor to the first field in this window (Order UM).
F5 - Accept Order UM
Accept the new unit and quantity entered.
F6 - Accept Stocking UM
Cancel the Ordered UM and quantity - enter the quantity using the
standard stocking units.
F7 - Invert Conv Factor
Inverts the new unit and the standard stocking unit, so that the
conversion can be figured using the opposite unit. For example, if you
are converting LB to PC the conversion displays as LB/PC and the factor
displays accordingly. If F7 is pressed, the conversion displays as PC/LB
and the factor displays accordingly.
If the UM Conversion has been used to enter an item using a new quantity unit,
the item price displays according to the new unit. You can accept this price or
press F8 to access the Price Conversion Window and calculate an item price
using a sub-unit of the new unit. For example, if you have entered an item
quantity in pounds (LB), you can enter the price of this item in LB or CW.
PO - 10 FPD/203
INTRODUCTION
![Page 11: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
The Price Conversion Window can also be used to changed the conversion factor
used to calculate the new price.
Field Explanation
U/M
The new unit of measure displays along with the new price.
To quote the item using a sub-unit of the new unit, enter it. For example,
if the new unit is PC, you may want to quote the price in EA, C, M, or
MM. Depending on your entry, the Ordered Price is recalculated.
Function Keys
F5 - Accept Price
Accept - accept the new price.
F6 - Accept Stocking UM
Cancel the Ordered UM and quantity - enter the quantity using the
standard stocking units.
F7 - Invert Conv Factor
Inverts the new unit and the sub-unit, so that the conversion can be
figured from the other unit. For example, if you want to order the item
using CW, and you are converting the price from pounds (LB), the
conversion is displayed as CW/LB. If F7 is pressed, the conversion
displays as LB/CW and the factor displays accordingly.
FPD/203 PO - 11
F8 - UM CONVERSION
![Page 12: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
Warehouse Information
Warehouse address information can be entered through the Warehouse
Maintenance program (PO/POM/WAM). If the warehouse address is entered, it
is used in the Purchase Order Entry program (PO/PE), and is available for used in
the Purchase Order Print program (PO/PP). Warehouse address information can
be displayed through the Warehouse Address Inquiry program (PO/POM/WAQ).
See the Warehouse Maintenance (PO/POM/WAM) section of the manual for
detailed information.
Items
Inventory and non-inventory items can be used when entering requisitions and
purchase orders. Buying history/tag records are saved only for inventory items.
See the Inventory Management (IM) and Tag System (TAG) sections of the
manual for detailed information.
Inventory items can be entered using the FASPAC part number, the description
code, the item shortname, or a cross-reference number. If the cross-reference
number used when entering a purchase order is flagged with a Y in the Note field
in the Cross-reference File (CR/MAI), an external note is automatically created.
When entering a cross-reference number, remember to first enter an exclamation
mark (!). When entering non-inventory items, remember to first enter an asterisk
(*).
Process Requisitions and Vendor Quotes
The Purchasing module includes programs used to create, change, print, display,
list and delete requisitions and vendor quote information. Requisitions can also
be created through the Order Desk program (OD) and through the Suggested
Reorder Report program (IMR/IMRM/SRR). Requisitions created through these
two programs can be accessed through the Purchasing module. See the
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes section (PO/REQ) of the manual for additional
information regarding creating a requisition. Requisitions and vendor quotes can
be displayed through the Part Inquiry program (PI).
Once a requisition is created, requests for quotes can be printed in a letter format
with or without vendor information. Vendor quote information is added to a
requisition as it is received from your vendors. Requisition and vendor quote
information can be tracked through the Requisitions/ Vendor Quotes Inquiry and
Listing programs (PO/REQ/RQI, PO/REQ/RQL). See the Requisition section
(PO/REQ) of the manual for detailed information regarding working with
existing requisitions and vendor quote information.
PO - 12 FPD/203
INTRODUCTION
![Page 13: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
To automatically create a purchase order from a vendor quote, the vendor quote
is flagged as preferred. Purchase orders are created for preferred vendor quotes
through the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP). See the
Create Preliminary Purchase Orders (PO/CPP) section of the manual for detailed
information.
Once you begin using the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes programs, you need to add
the Delete program (PO/REQ/RQD) to your monthly close procedures. Vendor
quotes not flagged to be saved and with a close date equal to or prior to the close
date specified when the Delete program is run are deleted. Deleted requisitions
and vendor quotes are no longer available to be displayed, printed, or listed. See
the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Delete (PO/REQ/RQD) section of the manual
for detailed information regarding the Delete program.
Status Code—Requisitions and Vendor Quotes
Requisitions and Vendor Quotes have Print and Purchase Order Status Codes.
The status code fields are updated by the system as the requisitions and vendor
quotes are created and printed and when purchase orders are created through the
Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP). The Vendor Quote PO
Status field can be flagged with a P at any time so that a purchase order is created
when the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program is run.
Requisition Status Code:
• Prt Status: blank = Created through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes
Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM), I = Created through the
Suggested Reorder Report program (IMR/IMR/SRR), Q = Created
through the Order desk program (OD), P = Printed through the
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print program (PO/REQ/RQP)
• PO Stat: P = The purchase order was created through the Create
Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP). If the PO Stat is P, the
purchase order number and vendor code are displayed in the PO NO and
Vend fields.
Vendor Quotes Status Codes:
• PO Status: P = Preferred. A purchase order will be created for this vendor
quote through the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP).
• PO Stat: P = A request for quote letter was printed through the
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print program (PO/REQ/RQP).
FPD/203 PO - 13
STATUS CODE—REQUISITIONS AND VENDOR QUOTES
![Page 14: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
Create a Requisition/Vendor Quote in Order Desk
The following paragraphs give an overview on how to create a requisition with or
without vendor quote information through the Order Desk program (OD). For
detailed information regarding the Order Desk fields used when creating a
requisition, see the Order Desk (OD) section of this manual.
Requisitions can be created through the Order desk program (OD) if the System
File (SYS/WCS) is flagged to do so. Vendor quote information can be added to a
requisition created through the Order Desk program at the time it is created or at
a later time. See the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance sections
(PO/REQ/RQM, PO/REQ/VQM) of the manual for information regarding
working with an existing requisition.
A requisition can be created for a customer quote or for a confirmed customer
order. The option to create a requisition is given prior to exiting after entering a
customer quote and prior to advancing to the Order Confirmation screen, when
confirming a customer order. See the Order Desk program (OD) section of the
manual for information on entering a customer quote and confirming an order.
If the option to create a requisition is selected, a requisition is created with all
items on the customer quote or order. The requisition number assigned displays
at the bottom of the screen and pressing RETURN acknowledges the message.
Creating a requisition through the Order Desk program creates a requisition the
same as if it was created through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance
program (PO/REQ/RQM). The fields in the requisition area of the screen are
updated based on the information entered in the Order Desk program. The date in
the Date Want field is either the item date wanted (if the System File (SYS/OPS)
is flagged to use the item date wanted option, or the sign on date (if the item date
wanted option is not being used). The date in the Date Ent field is the sign on
date, at the time the requisition was created through the Order Desk program.
Each requisition was created through the Order Desk program. can be accessed
through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM)
for changes and additions. See the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance
sections (PO/REQ/RQM, PO/REQ/VQM) of the manual for detailed information
on working with an existing requisition.
Once the request is created through the Order Desk program, the option to update
Requisitions/ Vendor Quotes is given. This option should be selected if you
know from which vendor you will purchase the items and you do not need to
send out requests for quotes. Vendor quote information added at this time is
flagged as preferred. purchase orders are created for preferred vendor quotes
through Create Preliminary Purchase Orders (PO/CPP) and Interactive Create
Preliminary PO’s (PO/ICPP). See the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders
program (PO/CPP) section of the manual for additional information. See the
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance section of the manual for detailed
information on working with existing vendor quotes.
PO - 14 FPD/203
INTRODUCTION
![Page 15: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
If you need to send out quote requests for the items on the requisition, do not
select the Update Requisitions/Vendor Quotes option. Create a Request For
Quote (RFQ) entry through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance
program (PO/REQ/RQM) for each vendor. Print the RFQ entries in a letter
format through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print program ((PO/REQ/ RQP).
A request for quote in letter format without vendor information can also be
printed through the same program. When information is received from your
vendors, it is added to the requisition through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes
Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM). See the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes
Maintenance section of the manual for information regarding creating an RFQ
Entry and adding/changing vendor quote information on an existing requisitions.
See the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print section of the manual for information
on printing a request for quote letters.
If you are sending out a request for quote letters, you may not know the customer
price at the time you enter the customer quote through the Order Desk program
(OD). Once you receive your vendor quote information and are able to determine
the customer price, the customer quote can be updated through the Customer
Quote Update program (PO/QMA), and if desired, the customer quote can be
printed through the Print Customer Quote program (OP/PCQ). Customer pricing
can also be corrected at the time the order is confirmed through the Order Desk
program. see the Order Processing (OP) section of the manual for detailed
information on these programs.
Create a Requisition in Suggested Reorder Report(IM/IMRP/SRR)
A requisition can be created based on the calculations performed by the
suggested Reorder Report program (IMR/IMRP/SRR). See the Inventory
Management Reports section of the manual for an explanation of the calculations
that take place when the Suggested Reorder Report program is run.
The Requisition created through the Suggested Reorder Report program can be
accessed through any of the Requisition/Vendor Quotes programs (PO/REQ).
Once vendor quote information is entered, the preferred vendor quotes can be
flagged so that the purchase orders can be created through Create Preliminary
Purchase Orders(PO/CPP) or Interactive Create Preliminary PO’s (PO/ICPP).
FPD/203 PO - 15
CREATE A REQUISITION IN SUGGESTED REORDER REPORT (IM/IMRP/SRR)
![Page 16: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
Process Purchase Orders
Purchase orders are created either through Purchase Order Entry (PO/PE), Create
Preliminary Purchase Orders (PO/CPP), or Interactive Create Preliminary POs
(PO/ICPP). If a purchase order is created through the Purchase Order Entry
program, the next sequential purchase order number can be assigned by the
system, or a manual purchase order number beginning with an alpha character
can be assigned. A purchase order created through the Create Preliminary
Purchase Orders program is always assigned the next sequential PO number.
If necessary, purchase orders can be modified through the Purchase Order
Maintenance and Line Maintenance programs (PO/PM, PO/PL). A purchase
order created through the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program often
needs some changes regarding the vendor ship-from address, and item
information. Changes can be made to a line any time prior to receiving the item
entered on the line (partially or in full). A purchase order entered in error can be
canceled through the Cancel program (PO/CAN). See the Purchase Order
Maintenance (PO/PM) and Purchase Order Line Maintenance (PO/PL), and the
Purchase Order Cancel (PO/CAN) sections of the manual for more information.
Purchase orders can be printed on plain paper or on purchase order forms. When
printing purchase orders you can print your company address, your warehouse
address, or no address. Back orders can be included or excluded when printing all
eligible POs. If printing all eligible purchase orders, all purchase orders changed
through either of the Maintenance program (PO/PM, PO/PL) print with the
appropriate status code (Heading Change, Line Change). See the Purchase Order
Print (PO/PP) section of the manual for more information about printing POs.
Expediting of POs can be facilitated by using the Listing program (PO/LIS). The
Listing program offers several options to provide you with a report specific to
your needs. See the Purchase Order Listing (PO/LIS) section of the manual for
more information on the available options and a sample report.
Purchase orders can be displayed through the Inquiry program (PO/INQ) up until
the time they are deleted through the Delete program (PO/POD). Purchase orders
can be accessed through the Inquiry program by purchase order number or by
vendor. The header information can be modified through the Inquiry program.
Line item information cannot be modified through the Inquiry program. See the
Purchase Order Inquiry (PO/INQ) section of the manual for detailed information.
After you begin using the purchase order programs, you need to add the Delete
program (PO/POD) to your monthly close procedures. Closed/completed
purchase orders/line items should remain in the system only for as long as you
require the ability to access them through the Inquiry, Print and Listing programs.
Deleted purchase orders cannot be displayed, printed, or listed. The Delete
program gives you the option to delete only closed purchase orders or to delete
all zero balance lines. See the Purchase Order Delete (PO/POD) section of the
manual for detailed information regarding deleting purchase orders.
PO - 16 FPD/203
INTRODUCTION
![Page 17: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
Status Codes—Purchase Orders
There are four status codes associated with purchase orders. These status codes
are updated by the system and they are:
• New—Only the purchase order header was created - no detail line items
have been added to the purchase order.
• Open—Receiving has not been done on any of the line items on this
purchase order.
• Partial Rec’d—Receiving has been done on one or more line items. If all
balances are 0, the incorrect method to exit the RPO program was used.
• Complet—Lines on this purchase order have been received, and the
balance of the purchase order was REC or CAN.
Status Codes—Printed Purchase Orders
• Duplicate—This purchase order has been previously printed.
• Heading Change—Changes were made to the header through the
Maintenance program (PO/PM).
• Line Change—Information on one or more line items was changed
through the Line Maintenance program (PO/PL). If a heading change and
a line change are made, only the Line Change status code prints.
Terms
Prt Status code—The code assigned to a requisition, vendor quote, or purchase
order, which reflects its print status. In the case of a requisition, the Prt Status
Code can reflect its origin (created through Requisitions/Vendor Quotes
Maintenance, through Order Desk, or through the Suggested Reorder Report)
prior to it being printed.
PO Status code—The code assigned to a requisition or vendor quote which
reflects it purchase order status. A vendor quote has a PO status code of P if it is
preferred and a purchase order is to be created through the Create Preliminary
Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP). A requisition has a PO status code of P if a
purchase order was created through the PO/CPP program.
Purchase Order Detail file—Contains line item information of all purchase
orders on file, updated by the Purchase Order Entry, Line Maintenance, and
Delete programs (PO/PE, PO/PL, PO/POD).
Purchase Order file—Contains records of all purchase orders on file, updated
by the Purchase Order Entry, Maintenance, and Delete programs (PO/PE,
PO/PM, PO/POD).
FPD/203 PO - 17
TERMS
![Page 18: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
purchase order header—Comprised of warehouse, vendor, and shipping
information, it prints in the upper area of a purchase order.
requisition—A formal request for items needed, entered through the
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance (PO/REQ/RQM), Order Desk (OD), or
Suggested Reorder Report program (IMR/IMRP/SRR).
RFQ entry—A request for quote entry, created through the Requisitions/Vendor
Quotes Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM), to be printed through the
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print program (PO/REQ/RQP).
Ship-From file—All vendor ship-from addresses, set up through the Ship-From
Maintenance program (PO/POM/SFM), used to save time when entering
purchase orders for vendors with more than one ship-from address.
Vendor file—All vendors on file, which were set up through the Vendor
Maintenance program (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM).
vendor quote—Information received from your vendor in response to your
request for quote, can be recorded through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes
Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM, PO/REQ/VQM).
Freight Allocation
Freight Allocation allows you to add freight charges to inventory costs. The
calculation is:
Freight Amount entered x (Extended weight of one line
Extended weight of all lines)
where Extended weight = IM/MAI weight x Qty Received
IM/MAI Unit of Measure
For purchasing, you can set flags to specify if vendors are to be charged for
freight, based on their address or, if applicable, from their ship-from address.
For receiving, actual freight amounts are distributed by the receiving programs
against received items, based on the flags set in the purchasing programs. While
receiving, the following should not be performed:
• Invoice Calculation & Update (INP/INC)
• Processing receipts through stock integration
• Finalizing the receipts register
• Deleting any tag or lot control records
PO - 18 FPD/203
INTRODUCTION
![Page 19: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
Set Flags in Purchasing Programs
To use Freight Allocation, flags must be set in the following programs.
Purchase Order (SYS/POS)
Use this program to enable Freight Allocation in FASPAC.
Enter Y in field 10 Apply Freight To Receipts?.
In the Vendor Maintenance (AP/MAR/VM), Ship From Maintenance
(PO/POM/SFM), and blanket PO programs, you will be able to set flags to
charge freight for vendors.
FPD/203 PO - 19
FREIGHT ALLOCATION
![Page 20: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
Vendor Maintenance (AP/MAR/VM)
In the second screen of this program, you can specify if the vendor is to be
charged for freight.
Enter Y in field 13 Freight Chgd. Spaces are considered the same as N.
This will be the default for each line entered on a purchase or WIP order, and can
be changed.
PO - 20 FPD/203
INTRODUCTION
![Page 21: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
Ship From Maintenance (PO/POM/SFM)
Use this screen to set the flag in the vendor’s ship-from address if the vendor is to
be charged for freight.
Enter Y in field 38 Frt Chgd. Spaces are considered the same as N.
This will be the default for each line entered on a purchase or WIP order, and can
be changed.
The purchasing programs look here first for the flag. If this field is set to N or left
blank, the flag set in Vendor Maintenance (AR/MAR/VM) will be used.
For example, if a New York vendor has a different ship-from address (such as
Boston), and freight is not required from Boston, you can set the flag here to N.
Freight will then be charged on orders from New York, but not from Boston.
Blanket Purchase Orders (PO/BPO)
The BPO programs will allow you to set the freight flag on the header and detail
lines. The flags set in these programs override the flags set in Vendor
Maintenance (AP/MAR/VM) and Ship From Maintenance (PO/POM/SFM).
The default flags in the following programs come from Vendor Maintenance
(AP/MAR/VM) and can be changed when a PO release is created.
• Blanket P.O. Maintenance/Entry (BPM)—Field 33
• Create Blanket PO Releases (BPC)—Field 18
• Blanket PO Release Line Maint (BPR)—Field 37
FPD/203 PO - 21
FREIGHT ALLOCATION
![Page 22: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
Effects in Other Programs
The following programs have been affected by Freight Allocations. Refer to the
reference manuals for information.
FASPAC User Manuals, Volume 2, TAG
• Freight Allocation Listing (TAG/TGM/FAL)
FASPAC User Manuals, Volume 3, PO
• Create Preliminary P.O.’s (PO/CPP)
• Interactive Create Prelim PO (PO/ICPP)
• Line Maintenance (PO/PL)
• Header Maintenance (PO/PM)
FASPAC User Manuals, Volume 3, REC
• Receive With A P.O. (REC/RPO)
• Receive Without A P.O. (REC/RNO)
FASPAC User Manuals, Volume 3, WIP
• Receive By Item (WIP/WHT/RWI)
• Receive By Order (WIP/WHT/RWO)
• Receive Packaging/Kit Orders (WIP/KITN/RPK)
• Receive Plating/Rework Orders (WIP/PLRW/RPR)
PO - 22 FPD/203
INTRODUCTION
![Page 23: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
Purchase Order Entry (PO/PE)
Use this program to create (and optionally print) open purchase orders. Creating
a purchase order consists of the following three steps:
1. Enter the header information and assign the purchase order number.
Header information consists of the warehouse number, vendor and
shipping information. The vendor must be a valid vendor from the
Vendor file that has been set up as a PO Vendor. The vendor cannot be
on hold. Purchase order numbers can be assigned sequentially by the
system or you can assign them manually. All manually assigned PO
numbers must begin with an alpha character (such as N12345).
Note: If you manually assign a PO number that begins with a B and ends
in with an alpha character, an error message displays, indicating that
these numbers are reserved for blanket purchase orders.
2. Enter each item
Inventory and non-inventory items can be entered on purchase orders.
However, Tag records are created only for inventory items. When
entering Non-inventory item, an asterisk (*) must precede the item
number. An inventory item can be entered using the FASPAC item
number, Description Code, shortname, or cross-reference number. If a
cross-reference number is used and the Note field in the Cross-Reference
file is flagged with Y, an external note consisting of the cross-reference
number is automatically created.
If the System file is flagged to print the Tag labels when the purchase
order is created, the Tag Label record is created at this time. If the
System file is flagged to print Tag Labels immediately, you are given the
option of printing a test pattern, followed by a request to enter the
number of copies wanted (1-99). If the System file is not flagged to print
Tag Records immediately, the records will print the next time you print
all eligible records through the Tag Print program (TAG/TPR). See the
System Maintenance and Tag manuals in Volumes 2 and 5 for additional
information.
If the System file is flagged to create the Tag Print record when receiving
is done, they will be created when the item is received through Receiving
With A Purchase Order (REC/RPO). See the System Maintenance, Tag,
and Receiving manuals in Volumes 2, 4, and 5 for additional information.
FPD/203 PO - 23
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 24: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
3. Enter up to nine note lines of information for each item.
Note lines can be either internal, external, or for the warehouse only. All
note lines can be printed on the purchase order, and displayed in the
Inquiry program (PO/INQ). Both internal and external notes print below
the item. You can select not to print internal notes when printing a
purchase order. Warehouse note lines print only in the tear-off section of
the purchase order.
A Status 1 Tag record is created for each item ordered on a purchase order. Refer
to the Tag manual in Volume 2 for additional information.
Entry/Inquiry Screen One
Field Explanation
22 Whse
Enter the warehouse number to which the items will be shipped.
Once a valid warehouse number is entered, the ship-to address
information from PO/WAM displays in fields 10-17.
Error Message:
Invalid Warehouse Or Warehouse Not Available
The warehouse number entered is either invalid or unavailable.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
PO - 24 FPD/203
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 25: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
Vend
Enter the vendor name or number, from whom you are purchasing the
items.
Remember, the vendor must be defined in the Vendor file as a PO
Vendor. You can access the Vendor file by entering the first character of
the vendor name or number, and pressing the appropriate function key
(F1 or F2). Press F3 and F4 to scroll forward and back through the list.
To accept the displayed vendor, press RETURN.
After you enter a vendor, you can access the Vendor Messages/Notes by
pressing F6.
Error Messages:
Invalid Entry, Function, or End of File . . . SKIP
Either an invalid vendor was entered, the wrong function key was
pressed, or the end of the Vendor file was reached while scrolling.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Vendor Not Set Up As A P.O. Vendor
The vendor entered was not flagged as a purchase order vendor when
it was created in the Vendor file (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM).
Either enter a different vendor or flag this vendor as a PO Vendor,
and begin again.
From
The default ship-from address (defined in the Vendor file) is displayed.
You can accept this address by pressing RETURN or enter the
Ship-From Address Code, from which the items will be shipped.
Ship-from addresses are created in Ship-From Maintenance
(PO/POM/SFM).
To access the list of ship-from addresses created for this vendor, enter
the first character of one of the ship-from codes and press F1. Press F3
and F4 to scroll forward and back through the list.
Press RETURN to accept the displayed ship-from address. The
Command Window - Look-up function is also available.
Error Messages:
End of File - SKIP
The end of the Vendor file was reached while scrolling.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
FPD/203 PO - 25
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 26: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
Vendor on Hold . . . Can Not Enter P.O. - SKIP
The vendor selected is flagged as on-hold in the Vendor file
(PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM). A purchase order cannot be created for a
vendor who is on-hold.
Press SKIP and enter a vendor that is not on-hold, or exit the
program.
20 Comment
F1 = Displays vendor default remarks (takes remark entered in
PO/POM/SFM and places it in the Comment field).
F6 = Displays vendor notes (see the Notes/Messages section for detailed
information).
25 Attn
The contact name defined in the Ship-From record is displayed. You can
accept this name by pressing RETURN or enter the name of the new
business contact.
The entry in this field affects this purchase order only, it does not change
the Ship-From Record.
27 Terms
The default is the Terms Code entered in Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM).
Press RETURN to accept this entry or change it if necessary. If a change
is made, it is for this purchase order only; the Terms Code in the Vendor
Master file is not changed.
28 FOB
The default is the FOB Code entered in Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM).
Press RETURN to accept this entry or change it if necessary. If a change
is made, it is for this purchase order only; the FOB Code in the Vendor
Master File is not changed.
29 Via
The default is the Ship-Via Code entered in Vendor Maintenance
(PO/VM).
Press RETURN to accept this entry or change it if necessary. If a change
is made, it is for this purchase order only; the Via Code in the Vendor
Master File is not changed.
31 Disc 1
32 Disc 2
33 Disc 3
These three fields default to the discount amounts entered in Vendor
Maintenance (PO/VM). You can manually change the amounts, but
remember that these figures are percentages. For example, 10.00 = 10%
discount.
PO - 26 FPD/203
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 27: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
34 Tax
The default is the entry in Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM), but can be
changed manually.
Y = Tax will be added when the purchase order total is calculated.
N = Tax will not be added. The sales tax percent used is determined in
System Maintenance (SYS/CIS).
35 Ordered
Enter the date the order was placed, using the MMDDYY or
MMDDYYYY format. The sign-on date is displayed. This date can be
accepted as the order date, or it can be changed.
36 Due
Enter the date the order is due, using the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY
format. The sign-on date is displayed. This date can be accepted as the
due date, or it can be changed.
37 Expedite
This is a manually updated field. Enter the date in MMDDYY or
MMDDYYYY format you wish to contact the vendor and follow up on
the PO you placed. The Purchase Order Listing can be used to print a list
of open purchase orders, based on the expedite date.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field you want to change. To accept all the
information as displayed, leave this field blank and press RETURN.
P.O.
The cursor moves to this field only after all the displayed information is
accepted. The next PO number to be assigned displays.
You can accept this number by pressing RETURN, enter a new number
manually, or leave this field blank and press SKIP to exit the program
without creating this purchase order.
If you enter a new PO number manually, remember that it must begin
with an alpha character. Once the PO number is accepted, screen two is
displayed.
Note: If you manually assign a PO number that begins with a B and ends
in with an alpha character, an error message displays, indicating that
these numbers are reserved for blanket purchase orders.
FPD/203 PO - 27
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 28: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
Error Messages:
P.O. Cannot Be Entered Until Monthly Update is Run - SKIP
The sign-on date is after the inventory date.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message, change the sign-on date or
run the Monthly Update (PH/MU), if applicable, and then enter the
purchase order.
The information displayed in the following fields comes from the
Ship-From file.
The cursor does not stop in these fields. You can access these fields to change the
information only by entering the field number from the SELECT field. If the
information in these fields is changed, the changes affect this purchase order
only. The Ship-From File is not changed.
From
The code and name of the vendor’s ship-from location.
03 Addr
04 Addr
05 Addr
06 Addr
The vendor’s ship from address.
07 City
The city in which the ship-from address is located.
State
The state in which the ship-from address is located.
08 Zip
The zip code of the ship-from address. Do not enter the dash.
Country
The country in which the ship-from address is located.
23 Phone 1
24 Phone 2
The phone numbers of the ship-from location.
26 Fax
The fax number of the ship-from location.
PO - 28 FPD/203
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 29: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
The information displayed in the following fields is from the
Warehouse file.
If information for the specified warehouse has not been entered in the Warehouse
file, the company information from the System file is displayed. The cursor does
not stop in these fields. You can access these fields to change the information
only by entering the field number from the SELECT field. If the information is
changed, it affects this purchase order only. The Warehouse file is not changed.
10 Ship To
The code and name of your warehouse location.
11 Addr
through
14 Addr
The address of the warehouse to which the items will be shipped.
15 City
State
The city and state where the warehouse is located.
16 Zip
The zip code of the warehouse address.
17 Phone
The phone number of the warehouse.
The following fields are updated by the system and cannot be
changed.
Remarks
The vendor remark created in the Ship-From file.
30 Min Ord
The minimum amount to be ordered from this vendor, as determined in
the Vendor file. This field serves as a reminder only. The amount of this
purchase order is not checked against this amount.
35 Ordered
The amount on order. This field is updated as items are added to the
order.
Rec’d
The amount received on this purchase order. This field is updated as
receipts are recorded.
FPD/203 PO - 29
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 30: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
Purchase Order Detail Screen Two
Field Explanation
Item
You can enter an inventory item or a non-inventory item on purchase
orders. If you want to enter an inventory item, you can enter the
FASPAC item number, shortname, Description Code, or cross-reference
number.
To access the list of inventory items, enter part of the FASPAC item
number or Description Code and press F1, or enter part of the shortname
and press F2. Then use F3 and F4 to scroll forward and back through the
list. Once you locate the item, press RETURN.
If you want to enter an item using the cross-reference number, remember
to enter an exclamation mark (!) before the number. If the Note field in
the Cross-Reference record is flagged with Y, an external note line is
automatically created. See the Cross-reference section of the manual for
detailed information.
Once a valid inventory item is accepted, the description is displayed and
the cursor moves to the Qty field. If you want to enter a non-inventory
item, remember to enter an asterisk (*) before the number.
After a non-inventory item is entered, the cursor moves to the second
line and “Enter Item Description” displays at the bottom of the screen.
You can enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters of description
information.
PO - 30 FPD/203
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 31: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
Error Messages:
End of File - SKIP
The end of the Item File (IM/MAI) was reached while scrolling.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Invalid Entry or Function
Either an invalid item was entered or the wrong function key was
pressed.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
08 Qty
Enter the quantity of this item that is on-order.
Press F8 to use the UM conversion. See the Introduction to Purchasing
for an explanation on how to use the UM Conversion.
09 Cost
For US, UK, and CN companies—if the Vendor Record (PO/VM,
AP/MAR/VM) has a valid Vendor Code, the cost displayed is from the
appropriate Vendor Price Table (IM/IMP/VPM).
For US and CN companies—if there isn’t a Vendor Code and the
replacement cost is not zero, the replacement cost is displayed. If the
replacement cost is zero, the list price is displayed.
For UK companies—if there is not a Vendor Code, the list price is
displayed. You can accept the displayed cost by pressing RETURN, or
change the price manually.
Note: This cost is only used if there is no entry in IM/IMP/VPM and the
replacement cost is greater than zero.
10 UM
The cursor moves to this field only if you enter a non-inventory item.
Enter the unit of measure in which you ordered this item. If you entered
an inventory item, the unit of measure from the Item Master File
(IM/MAI) automatically is displayed.
Price Per UM Quantity Unit
each EA or E PC
hundred C PC
thousand M PC
million MM PC
box BX BX
case CA CA
keg or bulk KE KE
FPD/203 PO - 31
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 32: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
Price Per UM Quantity Unit
pound LB LB
hundred weight CW LB
pound (2 decimal places) lb lb
feet FT FT
hundred feet CF FT
yards YD YD
The quantity unit of PC indicates pieces. When a quantity is entered, it is
entered per the quantity units. For example, buying 500 pieces at 3.50
per hundred pieces, you would enter 500 for the quantity, not 5. Then
enter the price at 3.50 with the unit of measure C. The extension is
calculated: 3.50 x 500/100 = 17.50, price x quantity / um value.
11 Disc
12 Disc
13 Disc
The discount amounts entered in the previous screen display. Remember
these figures are percentages. For example 10.00 = 10% discount. You
can accept these percentages by pressing RETURN, or enter new
discounts manually. Remember, a discount entered in one of these fields
affects this particular item only.
15 Due
The date entered in the Due field of the first screen is displayed. You can
accept this date by pressing RETURN, or enter a new date manually.
16 Loc
The entry displayed in this field is based on the flag in the Default
Location field in the System File (SYS/POS). If this flag is a P, the
item’s Primary Bin Location is displayed. If the item does not have a
Primary Bin Location, the default location in SYS/WCS is displayed. If
this flag is a W, the default location in SYS/WCS always is displayed. If
SYS is flagged to validate stock locations, the location entered must be
defined in the Location File (TAG/SLM).
Error Message:
Invalid Stock/Bin Location – Return
The System File (SYS/WCS) is flagged to validate locations, and the
location entered is not defined in the Location File (TAG/SLM).
Press RETURN and begin again.
PO - 32 FPD/203
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 33: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
17 Order
The Order and Line fields are used only if the item on-order is reserved
for an open customer order (in Order Desk). Enter the customer order
number to which the item is committed. The entire quantity is
committed, regardless of the quantity on the customer order. You can
print the customer, the order number and the line number to which the
item is committed, when you print the purchase order, by entering Y in
the Include PO Commitment field.
Line
Enter the line number of the customer order, to which the item is
committed. If this item is not committed to an open customer order, leave
this field blank and press SKIP.
Error Message:
Cust Order And Line Not Found – SKIP
The order and line number entered cannot be found on file.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and enter a valid, open
customer order and line number.
18 Comm
This field is optional. If you choose to enter a comment, it will print on
the right hand side of the purchase order.
35 Tax
Press RETURN to accept the displayed tax status.
Y = Tax will be calculated on this item.
N = Tax will not be calculated on this item. Remember the entry in this
field affects the displayed item only.
36 Rework
Y = This item will be sent out for rework. when this item is received, the
Rework Order Entry screen automatically displays, so that a rework
order can be entered.
N = This is not a rework item.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field you want to change.
To accept all the entries as displayed, press RETURN.
FPD/203 PO - 33
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 34: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
Update the Replacement Cost of This Item? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the price in the Cost field does not equal
the current replacement cost in the Item File (IM/MAI) and SYS/POS is
set to ask (A) whether or not to update replacement cost.
Y = The Item Record (IM/MAI) is updated with the price entered in this
program.
N = The Item Record (IM/MAI) is not updated.
Update Vendor Price Table With New Cost? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if SYCD is set to ask (A) whether or not to
update Vendor Price Table in PO Entry and Receiving.
Y = The Vendor Price Table is updated with the cost entered in this
program.
N = The Vendor Price Table is not updated.
Print Tag Now? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the System File (SYS/LAI) is flagged to
ask if labels are to be printed when a purchase order is entered, and the
Label Type is I.
Y = Print the labels.
N = Do not want to print the labels.
Set Tag For Delayed Print? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the System File (SYS/LAI) is flagged to
ask if labels are to be printed when a purchase order is entered, and the
Label Type is D.
Y = A Tag Print Record is created and included when the All Eligible
option is selected in the Tag Print program (TAG/TPR).
Number of Tag Copies To Print - Include Original
This field is displayed only if Tag Record Labels are being printed
immediately. See the System Maintenance section of the manual
(SYS/LAI) for detailed information.
Do You Want To Insert Notes? (Y/N)
Y = The Note Maintenance screen automatically is displayed.
N = The cursor moves back to the Item field, allowing you to enter
another item on this purchase order. See the end of this section for
detailed field explanations on the Note Maintenance screen.
PO - 34 FPD/203
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 35: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
Print Purchase Order Now (Y/N)?
This question is displayed after you enter or modify a PO.
Y = Print the purchase order.
N = Do not print the purchase order.
Note: Field 11 in SYS/POS must be set to Y for this question to be
displayed.
The following fields are updated by the system and cannot be
changed.
P.O.
The purchase order number entered in the previous screen.
Vend
The vendor entered in the previous screen.
From
The ship-from vendor address entered in the previous screen.
Whse
The warehouse number entered in the previous screen.
Ext
The total cost, less the discounts.
The following fields display information from the Warehouse
Inventory File (IM/MAI) for the specified item and warehouse.
This information cannot be modified. Information does not display if a
non-inventory item is entered.
Available
The available quantity is equal to the on-hand quantity plus the on-order
quantity, less the total committed quantity.
Minimum
The minimum on-hand quantity.
Box
The quantity per box.
Case
The quantity per case.
FPD/203 PO - 35
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 36: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
Bulk
The bulk (keg) quantity.
Unit Volume
The unit volume per the unit of measure.
On Ord Rewk
The total quantity on open plating/rework orders (WIP/POP).
Process
The total quantity on open kitting orders (WIP/POK).
Whse Trans
The total quantity on-order from other warehouses (WIP/WHT).
Purch Ord
The total quantity on open purchase orders (PO/PE).
On Hand Rewk
The total quantity in plating/rework. This quantity is deducted from the
Whse stock quantity.
Whse Stock
The quantity on-hand in the warehouse. This quantity does not include
stock on-hand in plating/rework and in process (kits).
Commit Order
The total quantity committed on all open customer orders.
Whse Trans
The total quantity committed on all open warehouse transfer orders.
Process
The total quantity committed to all open kitting orders.
UM
The unit of measure.
Weight
The weight per unit of measure.
Repl Cost
The replacement cost per the unit of measure.
PO - 36 FPD/203
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 37: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
Note Maintenance Screen Three
Field Explanation
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field on which you want to create/edit a
note. When creating notes, we recommend you start with line 1 and
move down the screen in order.
To exit this screen, leave blank and press RETURN.
Type
DE = Delete the existing note on the line entered.
I = Create an internal note.
E = Create an external note. Both internal and external notes print under
the item. You can select not to print internal notes when printing a
purchase order.
W = Create a note that prints in the warehouse section only. If you are
using purchase order forms, the warehouse notes print on the right,
tear-off section. If you are printing internal notes on plain paper, the
warehouse notes do not print.
Note
A note line can consist of any combination of characters you want. All
notes can be printed on the purchase order, and displayed in the Inquiry
program.
After you have finished entering notes, press RETURN, while in the
SELECT field. This will take you back to the Line Entry screen. From
there you must press CMD to exit the program entirely. All entries will
be saved.
FPD/203 PO - 37
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 38: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
Note: A maximum of 30 characters is allowed when creating a
warehouse note (note type W).
The following fields are updated by the system and cannot be changed
through this screen.
P.O.
The purchase order number entered in the previous screen.
Vend
The vendor entered in the previous screen.
From
The ship-from vendor address entered in the previous screen.
Comment
The comment entered in the previous screen.
Line
The line number assigned to this item.
PO - 38 FPD/203
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY (PO/PE)
![Page 39: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
Interactive Create Preliminary P.O.
(PO/ICPP)
The Interactive Create Preliminary P.O. program is used to assign vendor quotes
the status of preferred (P). Once a requisition has at least one vendor quote
flagged as preferred (P), it is considered an “eligible requisition” and a purchase
order can be created through the Create Preliminary Purchase Order program
(PO/CPP).
Once an item is specified, the list of existing requisitions is displayed. You must
then select the requisition number for which to display the list of vendor quotes.
Finally, select the vendor quotes to flag as preferred (P).
If you have enabled Freight Allocations, the freight flag is updated to the
purchase order from either the Vendor Maintenance (VM) or Ship From
Maintenance (SFM) flags. It can be changed in Header Maintenance (PO/PM) or
Line Maintenance (PO/PL).
Entry/Inquiry Screen
FPD/203 PO - 39
INTERACTIVE CREATE PRELIMINARY P.O. (PO/ICPP)
![Page 40: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number from which to display the list of
requisitions for the item.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP.
Error Message:
Invalid Warehouse Number SKIP
You have entered a warehouse number that is not set up as a valid
system warehouse.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and enter a valid system
warehouse number.
Item
Enter the item number for which to display the list of requisitions.
You can access the list of FASPAC inventory items by entering the first
part of the number or Description Code and pressing F1, or by entering
the first part of the shortname and pressing F2. Use F3 to scroll forward
and F4 to scroll back through the list. Once you locate the desired item,
press RETURN.
You can display the entire list of inventory items by pressing the CMD
key and selecting the Look-Up function (L). Select the method by which
to display the list:
I = Item Number
S = Shortname
N = Xref By Item Number
X = Xref By Xref Number
D = Description Code
Once the list is displayed, use the arrow keys to move up and down.
To accept the highlighted item, press RETURN.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry Or Function. . SKIP
Either an invalid item number was entered, the wrong function key
was pressed, or the end of the file was reached while scrolling
through the list.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
PO - 40 FPD/203
INTERACTIVE CREATE PRELIMINARY P.O. (PO/ICPP)
![Page 41: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
SELECT
Use the function keys to scroll through the list of requisitions:
F3 = Scrolls forward through the list.
F1 = Re-displays the list from the beginning
To display the list of vendor quotes for a particular requisition, enter the
requisition number. The Vendor Quote Inquiry screen is displayed.
To display the vendor quotes for all displayed requisitions, leave this
field blank and press SKIP. The Vendor Quote Inquiry screen is
displayed.
FPD/203 PO - 41
INTERACTIVE CREATE PRELIMINARY P.O. (PO/ICPP)
![Page 42: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
Vendor Quote Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
SELECT
P is displayed on the left side of the screen, next to the quotes that are
currently flagged as preferred.
Use the function keys to scroll through the displayed list:
F3 = Scrolls forward through the list
F1 = Re-displays the list from the beginning
To flag a quote as preferred, enter the line number. The following field is
displayed. After you have finished flagging the quotes, press SKIP to
return to the previous screen.
OK to change status to P (Y/N)?
Y = Change the status of the specified vendor quote to P (preferred).
N = Do not change the status of the specified vendor quote to P
(preferred).
Once a valid entry is made in this field the cursor returns to the SELECT
field, at which point you may select another vendor quote or press SKIP
to return to the previous screen.
PO - 42 FPD/203
INTERACTIVE CREATE PRELIMINARY P.O. (PO/ICPP)
![Page 43: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
Error Messages
Invalid Price. Unable to Change Status. SKIP
An invalid number was entered as the price. A purchase order cannot be
created with this price, so the status of the quote cannot be flagged as
preferred.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message.
Invalid Quantity. Unable to Change Status. SKIP
Zero or a negative number was entered as the quantity. A purchase order
cannot be created for this quantity, so the status of the quote cannot be
flagged as preferred.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message.
Not a PO Vendor. Unable to Change Status. SKIP
This vendor is not flagged as a purchase order Vendor in Vendor
Maintenance (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM). A purchase order cannot be
created for a vendor that is not flagged as a PO Vendor, so the status of
this quote cannot be changed to preferred.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message.
The following errors may be printed on the listing generated by the
Interactive Create Preliminary P.O. program.
You must run the program again (PO/ICPP) after correcting the errors in order to
create the purchase orders.
Inventory Master Record Not Found
The Item Mater Record (IM/MAI, screen one) has been deleted. If you
want a purchase order created for this item, you must first recreate the
record through the Inventory Maintenance program (IM/MAI).
Inventory Whse Record Not Found
The Item Warehouse Record (IM/MAI, screen two) has been deleted. If
you want a purchase order created for this item, you must first recreate
the record through the Inventory Maintenance program (IM/MAI).
Vendor Not Found
The Vendor Record has been deleted.
Either enter a different vendor for this requisition item through the
Requisition Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM) or set up the vendor
though the Vendor Maintenance program (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM).
FPD/203 PO - 43
INTERACTIVE CREATE PRELIMINARY P.O. (PO/ICPP)
![Page 44: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
Vend Ship From Not Found
The Ship From Record has been deleted.
Either change the Ship From through the Requisition Maintenance
program (PO/REQ/RQM) or set up the Ship From Record through the
Ship From Maintenance program (PO/POM/SFM).
Warehouse Address Not Found
The Warehouse Record is not defined in the Warehouse File. Set up the
record through the Warehouse Address Maintenance program
(PO/POM/WAM).
Customer Order Not Found
The customer order number assigned to the item requisition is not on file.
Determine what the correct order number is and correct the requisition
through the Requisition Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM).
Customer Order Line Not Found
The customer order line number assigned to the item requisition is not on
file. Determine what the correct line number is and correct the requisition
through the Requisition Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM).
P.O. Already Created
A purchase order was previously created for this requisition item.
PO - 44 FPD/203
INTERACTIVE CREATE PRELIMINARY P.O. (PO/ICPP)
![Page 45: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
Create Preliminary Purchase
Orders (PO/CPP)
The Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP) is used to create
purchase orders for eligible requisitions. An “eligible requisition” is one that has
at least one vendor quote flagged as preferred and has not had a purchase order
created yet. A vendor quote can be flagged as preferred through the Interactive
Create Preliminary P.O. program (PO/ICPP). Preferred quotes are identified
with P.
The created purchase orders are referred to as preliminary, since often times
these purchase orders need to be amended through the Purchase Order
Maintenance and Line Maintenance programs (PO/PM, PO/PL) prior to being
printed. For example; you may want to change the vendor ship-from address
and/or add line items.
Purchase orders can be created for all or a range of eligible requisitions. One
purchase order can be created for each line on each requisition, or one purchase
order can be created for each vendor. If you are creating one purchase order for
each vendor, items on the purchase order can be from the same requisition only,
or from all requisitions. For example; if the same vendor is on two requisitions,
you can create two separate purchase orders or one purchase order with the items
from both requisitions. A report prints, indicating the PO number assigned to
each order. If any errors are found when the orders are created they will print on
the report.
If the created purchase order is from a requisition that was created through Order
Desk (OD), the notes entered for each item are transferred to the purchase order
(if flagged to do so) when originally entered. See the Order Desk section of the
manual for additional information.
A Status 1 Tag Record is created for each item ordered. The Delivery Date in the
Vendor Quote Record is used as the Item Date Wanted. The quantity ordered for
each item is committed to the appropriate customer order. If the item ordered is
for stock (not for a customer order), no quantity is committed. Refer to the Tag
(TAG) section of the manual for detailed information regarding Tag Records.
If you have enabled Freight Allocations, the freight flag is updated to the
purchase order from either the Vendor Maintenance (VM) or Ship From
Maintenance (SFM) flags. It can be changed in Header Maintenance (PO/PM) or
Line Maintenance (PO/PL).
FPD/203 PO - 45
CREATE PRELIMINARY PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/CPP)
![Page 46: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number in which to create the purchase orders.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP or CMD.
Print Tags Immediately? (Y/N)
This field displays at the bottom of the screen if the System File
(SYS/LAI) is flagged to ask whether or not Tags are to be printed
immediately.
Y = Print Tags immediately.
N = Do not print Tags immediately.
Create P.O.’s For All Eligible Requisitions? (Y/N)
Y = Create purchase orders for all eligible requisitions.
N = Create purchase orders for specific requisitions only.
Note: an eligible requisition is one that has at least one vendor quote
flagged as preferred and for which a purchase order has not yet been
created.
Specific Requisitions OR a Range? (S/R)
This field is displayed only if you entered N in the Create P.O.’s For All
Eligible Requisitions field.
S = Specify the requisitions to include individually.
R = Specify a range of requisitions to include.
PO - 46 FPD/203
CREATE PRELIMINARY PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/CPP)
![Page 47: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
The following fields are displayed only if you entered S in the Specific
Requisitions OR a Range field.
Req.#
Four columns display, numbered from 01 to 40.
Enter each requisition number to include on the purchase orders. After
you have finished entering numbers, press SKIP.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field you want to change or delete.
Leave this field blank and press SKIP to accept the displayed entries.
From Requisition
Thru Requisition
These fields are displayed only if you entered R in the Specific
Requisitions OR a Range field.
Enter the range of requisition numbers to include on the purchase orders.
The following fields apply to all entries.
Group By Vendor Within Requisition? (Y/N)
Y = Combine items for the SAME vendor either per requisition OR for
all requisitions.
N = Create one purchase order for each line on each requisition.
Group By Vendor Across Requisitions? (Y/N)
This field is available only if Y was entered in the previous field.
Y = Combine items on all requisitions for the SAME vendor on ONE
purchase order.
N = Combine items for the same vendor within each requisition only.
Keep Requisitions Open? (Y/N)
Y = leave each requisition open, so that they may be used at a later time.
Purchase order numbers are not updated to the requisitions and the flag
in the PO Status field is cleared.
N = Close each of the requisitions. Purchase order numbers are updated
to the requisitions.
Do You Want To Continue? (Y/N)
Y = Create the purchase orders as specified.
N = Exit the program without creating purchase orders.
FPD/203 PO - 47
CREATE PRELIMINARY PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/CPP)
![Page 48: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
The following fields are displayed only if SYS/LAI is flagged to print
labels immediately.
Do You Want To Print A Test Pattern? (Y/N)
Y = Print a test pattern before printing the labels.
N = Print the labels immediately, without printing a test pattern first.
Number Of Tag Copies to Print - Include Original
Enter the number of labels to print for each order.
Error Messages
P.O.’s Cannot Be Created Until Monthly Update is Run - SKIP
You are signed on to a date not in the current inventory month and year.
Press SKIP to acknowledge the message. Sign on again using a date in
the current inventory month and year or run the Monthly Update
program (MU); whichever is applicable.
Warehouse Control Record Note Set Up in SYS
The warehouse number entered was set up through the System Code
Maintenance program (SYCD), but the control record was not defined in
the System File (SYS/WCS).
Press RETURN to acknowledge this message.
To use the warehouse number, the warehouse control record must be set
up.
Requisition Not On File
An invalid requisition number was entered.
Press RETURN to acknowledge the message. The cursor moves back to
the Req. # field. Begin again or press SKIP to exit.
The following errors may be printed on the listing generated by the
Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program.
You must run the program again (PO/CPP) after correcting the errors in order to
create the purchase orders.
Inventory Master Record Not Found
The Item Mater Record (IM/MAI, screen one) has been deleted. If you
want a purchase order created for this item, you must first recreate the
record through the Inventory Maintenance program (IM/MAI).
PO - 48 FPD/203
CREATE PRELIMINARY PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/CPP)
![Page 49: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
Inventory Whse Record Not Found
The Item Warehouse Record (IM/MAI, screen two) has been deleted. If
you want a purchase order created for this item, you must first recreate
the record through the Inventory Maintenance program (IM/MAI).
Vendor Not Found
The Vendor Record has been deleted.
Either enter a different vendor for this requisition item through the
Requisition Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM) or set up the vendor
though the Vendor Maintenance program (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM).
Vend Ship From Not Found
The Ship From Record has been deleted.
Either change the Ship From through the Requisition Maintenance
program (PO/REQ/RQM) or set up the Ship From Record through the
Ship From Maintenance program (PO/POM/SFM).
Warehouse Address Not Found
The Warehouse Record is not defined in the Warehouse File. Set up the
record through the Warehouse Address Maintenance program
(PO/POM/WAM).
Customer Order Not Found
The customer order number assigned to the item requisition is not on file.
Determine what the correct order number is and correct the requisition
through the Requisition Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM).
Customer Order Line Not Found
The customer order line number assigned to the item requisition is not on
file. Determine what the correct line number is and correct the requisition
through the Requisition Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM).
P.O. Already Created
A purchase order was previously created for this requisition item.
FPD/203 PO - 49
CREATE PRELIMINARY PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/CPP)
![Page 50: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
Line Maintenance (PO/PL)
The Purchase Order Line Maintenance program is used to add, delete, or change
a line item or note line on an open purchase order. When finished, you can also
print the purchase order from this program.
Purchase orders created through the Entry program (PO/PE) and through the
Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP) can be changed through
this program.
A line item can be added to any open purchase order. If receiving has not begun
on a line item, it can be deleted or changed. If a line item has been back ordered
in full and the order quantity is changed, the back ordered quantity is changed to
the same quantity. If receiving has begun on a line item, only the due date can be
changed.
Changes made through the Purchase Order Line Maintenance program affect the
Tag Records. See the Tag (TAG) and Inventory Buying History Maintenance
(IM/BHM) sections of the manual for information on Tag Records.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
PO - 50 FPD/203
LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/PL)
![Page 51: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
Field Explanation
P. O.
Enter the purchase order number on which to add, change, or delete a
line item and/or a note line.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP or RETURN.
Error Messages:
Closed Status - SKIP to Continue
The purchase order number entered is closed.
Press SKIP and either exit this program OR enter another number.
P. O. Not on File – SKIP
The purchase order number entered is not an open purchase order on
file.
Press SKIP and begin again.
Enter Function: A - Add, C - Change/Delete
A = Add a line to this purchase order. The cursor moves to the Item field.
C = Change or delete a line item, or to add, delete, or change a note line
on this purchase order. The cursor moves to the Line field.
The following fields apply only if you selected to ADD a line to this
purchase order. Any changes to PE7-PE8 must be made here.
Item
You can enter an inventory item or a non-inventory item
If you want to enter an inventory item, you can enter the FASPAC item
number, shortname, Description Code, or cross-reference number.
To access the list of inventory items, enter part of the FASPAC item
number or Description Code and press F1, or enter part of the shortname
and press F2. Then use F3 and F4 to scroll forward and back through the
list. Once you locate the desired item, press RETURN.
If you want to enter an item using the cross-reference number, remember
to enter an exclamation mark (!) before the number. If the Note field in
the Cross-Reference record is flagged Y, an external note line is
automatically created. See the Cross-Reference section of the manual for
detailed information.
Once a valid inventory item is accepted, the description is displayed and
the cursor moves to the Qty field.
FPD/203 PO - 51
LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/PL)
![Page 52: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
If you want to enter a non-inventory item, remember to enter an asterisk
(*) before the number. After a non-inventory item is entered, the cursor
moves to the second line and “Enter Item Description” displays at the
bottom of the screen. You can enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters of
description information.
Error Messages:
Unit of measure Cannot Change
You are changing a non-inventory item. The unit of measure entered
for the non-inventory item can not be changed and it is not
compatible with the unit of measure of the inventory item.
Press RETURN twice. The cursor moves to the SELECT field.
Delete the line with the non-inventory item and then add a line with
the inventory item.
Warehouse ______ Not IN use For This Item - SKIP
The warehouse record has not been set up for this item; this item
cannot be ordered.
Press SKIP and enter another item or exit the program.
08 Qty
Enter the quantity of this item that is on order.
09 Cost
US, UK, and CN companies—If the Vendor Record (PO/VM,
AP/MAR/VM) has a valid Vendor Code, the cost displayed is from the
appropriate Vendor Price Table (IM/IMP/VPM).
US and CN companies—If there isn’t a Vendor Code and the
replacement cost is not zero, the replacement cost is displayed. If the
replacement cost is zero, the list price is displayed.
UK companies—If there is not a Vendor Code, the list price is displayed.
You can accept the displayed cost by pressing RETURN, or change the
price manually.
10 Um
The cursor moves to this field only if you enter a non-inventory item.
Enter the unit of measure in which you ordered this item. If you entered
an inventory item, the unit of measure from the Item Master File
(IM/MAI) automatically is displayed.
PO - 52 FPD/203
LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/PL)
![Page 53: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
Price Per UM Quantity Unit
each EA or E PC
hundred C PC
thousand M PC
million MM PC
box BX BX
case CA CA
keg or bulk KE KE
pound LB LB
hundred weight CW LB
pound (2 decimal places) lb lb
feet FT FT
hundred feet CF FT
yards YD YD
The quantity unit of PC indicates pieces. When a quantity is entered, it is
entered per the quantity units. For example, buying 500 pieces at 3.50
per hundred pieces, you would enter 500 for the quantity, not 5. Then
enter the price at 3.50 with the unit of measure C. The extension is
calculated: 3.50 x 500/100 = 17.50, price x quantity/um value.
11 Disc
12 Disc
13 Disc
To subtract the discount amount from the price, do not enter a negative
sign. If a negative sign is entered in this field, the price will be increased
by the specified percent.
Enter percentages in decimals. For example, 10.00 = 10% discount.
Note: The cursor will move to the second and third Disc fields only if a
figure was entered in the first Disc field.
15 Due
You can accept the displayed due date by pressing RETURN or enter
new date in MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format.
FPD/203 PO - 53
LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/PL)
![Page 54: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
16 Loc
The entry displayed in this field is based on the flag in the Default
Location field in the System File (SYS/POS).
If this flag is a P, the item’s Primary Bin Location is displayed. If the
item does not have a Primary Bin Location, the default location in
SYS/WCS is displayed.
If this flag is a W, the default location in SYS/WCS always is displayed.
If SYS is flagged to validate stock locations, the location entered must be
defined in the Location File (TAG/SLM).
17 Order
This field is used only if the item you are purchasing is reserved for an
open customer order (in Order Desk).
Enter the customer order number to which the item is committed. The
entire quantity is committed regardless of the quantity on the customer
order. The system flags the item as Status 1. See the Tagging System
section of the manual for detailed information regarding Status 1 Tag
Records.
You can print the customer, the order number and the line number to
which the item is committed when you print the purchase order, by
entering Y in the Include PO commitment field.
Line
This field is used only if the item you are purchasing is reserved for an
open customer order (in Order Desk).
Enter the line number of the customer order, to which the item is
committed.
Error Messages:
Buying History Record Not Found
The Tag Record is not a Status 1 record. Only Status 1 records are
available for maintenance. Refer to the Tag and the Inventory
Buying History Maintenance sections of the manual for information
regarding Tag Records.
No Record Exists For This Line Number
The line number entered does not exist for the purchase order
number entered.
Press SKIP and begin again.
Receipts Started
Receiving has begun on this line item. If the ordered quantity was
back ordered in full, the ordered quantity can be changed and the
back ordered quantity will be changed to reflect the new ordered
quantity. If the ordered quantity was not back ordered in full, only
the due date can be changed.
PO - 54 FPD/203
LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/PL)
![Page 55: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
18 Comm
This field is optional. If you choose to enter a comment, it will print on
the right hand side of the purchase order.
35 Tax
Y = Tax is calculated on the item.
N = Tax is not calculated on the item.
36 Rework
Y = This item will be sent out for rework. When this item is received, the
Rework Order Entry screen automatically displays, so that a rework
order can be entered.
N = This is not a rework item.
Once a valid entry is made in this field, the cursor moves to the SELECT
field.
37 Duty %
Enter the duty percent to be added to the net cost on the Tag record. It
will also be listed on the Receipts Register.
38 Frt %
Enter the freight percent to be added to the net cost on the Tag record. It
will also be listed on the Receipts Register.
If you use this field, you cannot use field 39.
39 Frt Chg
This field is displayed if Freight Allocations is enabled in FASPAC.
It displays the freight flag (Y or N) that is updated on the purchase order
from Vendor Maintenance (VM) or Ship From Maintenance (SFM). You
can change the flag for this line item.
If you use this field, you cannot use field 38.
Note: The net cost on the Tag record includes the freight.
The following fields apply only if you selected to CHANGE or
DELETE a line item.
Line
Enter the line number to display.
FPD/203 PO - 55
LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/PL)
![Page 56: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
SELECT
Enter the field number of the entry you want to change.
Note: Information can be changed only if receiving has not begun on the
specified item. The item can be changed only if it is a non-inventory
item.
Enter DE to delete this line item from the purchase order.
Enter NO to add, change, or delete a note line. See the Purchase Order
Entry (PO/PE) section for detailed field explanations on the Note
Maintenance screen.
After you have finished adding/changing entries, leave this field blank
and press SKIP to begin exiting the program.
Update the Replacement Cost With The Cost of This Item? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the net cost (cost less discounts does not
equal the current replacement cost in the Item File (IM/MAI).
Do You Want To Insert Notes? (Y/N)
Y = Add, change, or delete a note line.
N = Do not to update the notes.
Note: If Y is entered, the Note Entry screen is automatically accessed.
Update Vendor Price Table With New Cost? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the Update Replacement Cost field in
SYS/POS is flagged with A (ask).
Print Tag Now? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the System File (SYS/LAI) is flagged to
ask if labels are to be printed when a purchase order is entered AND the
Label Type is I.
Set Tag For Delayed Print? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the System File (SYS/LAI) is flagged to
ask if labels are to be printed when a purchase order is entered AND the
Label Type is D.
Y = A Tag Print Record is created and included when the All Eligible
option is selected in the Tag Print program (TAG/TP).
Do You Want To Print A Test Pattern? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if Tag Record labels are being printed
immediately.
Y = Print a test pattern before printing the labels.
N = Print the labels immediately, without printing a test pattern.
PO - 56 FPD/203
LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/PL)
![Page 57: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
Number of Tag Copies To Print - Include Original
This field is displayed only if Tag Record labels are being printed
immediately.
Enter a number from 1 to 9999.
Update history With This Change? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if a change made to an existing line caused
the amount in the Ext field to change or if one or more line items are
added.
Y = The History File (PO/HM) reflects the change.
Only Notes Changed. Flag P.O. To Be Reprinted? (Y/N)
Y = Flag this PO to be reprinted.
N = Do not flag the PO to be reprinted.
Print Purchase Order Now (Y/N)?
This question is displayed after you enter or modify a PO.
Y = Print the purchase order.
N = Do not print the purchase order.
Note: Field 11 in SYS/POS must be set to Y for this question to be
displayed.
The following fields display information from the Inventory file and
cannot be modified.
Available
The available quantity is equal to the on hand quantity less the total
committed quantity.
Minimum
The minimum on hand quantity.
Maximum
The maximum on hand quantity.
Box
The per box quantity.
Case
The per case quantity.
Bulk
The bulk (keg) quantity.
FPD/203 PO - 57
LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/PL)
![Page 58: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
On Ord Rewk
The total quantity on open plating/rework orders (WIP/POP).
Process
The total quantity on open kitting orders (WIP/POK).
Whse Trans
The total quantity on order from other warehouses (WI/WHT).
Purch Ord
The total quantity on open purchase orders.
On Hand Rewk
The total quantity in plating/rework. This quantity has been deducted
from the Whse Stock quantity.
Whse Stock
The quantity on hand in the warehouse is displayed. This quantity does
not include stock on hand in plating/rework or in process (kits).
Commit Order
The total quantity committed on all open customer orders.
Whse Trans
The total quantity committed on all open warehouse transfer orders.
Process
The total quantity committed to all open kitting orders.
UM
The unit of measure.
Weight
The weight per the unit of measure.
Repl Cost
The replacement cost per the unit of measure.
PO - 58 FPD/203
LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/PL)
![Page 59: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
Header Maintenance (PO/PM)
Use this program to change the information in the header portion of an open
purchase order, and optionally to print the purchase order.
Purchase orders created through the Purchase Order Entry program (PO/PE) and
through the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP) can be
changed through the Header Maintenance program.
Changes made through this program affect the specified purchase order only. The
Vendor file and the Ship From file are not affected.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
P.O.
Enter the purchase order number on which to change the header
information.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field to change.
After you have finished making changes, leave this field blank and press
RETURN. The cursor returns to the P.O. field.
You can enter another PO number or press SKIP to exit the program.
FPD/203 PO - 59
HEADER MAINTENANCE (PO/PM)
![Page 60: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
Update Item Due Date - All items, Only Due Date = Orig Date, No Item?
(A/O/N)
This field is displayed only if the date in the Due field is changed.
A = Update the due date of all items on the purchase order to match the
new date entered in the Header.
O = Update only those items whose due date matched the original due
date in the Header. For example: the original Header due date was 5/10.
It was changed to 6/10. If O is entered in this field, only those items that
have a due date of 5/10 will be updated with the new due date of 6/10.
N = Do not change any of the item due dates.
Print Purchase Order Now (Y/N)?
This question is displayed after you enter or modify a PO.
Y = Print the purchase order.
N = Do not print the purchase order.
Note: Field 11 in SYS/POS must be set to Y for this question to be
displayed.
The following fields display information that was entered when this
purchase order was created in the Purchase Order Entry program
(PO/PE).
Changes made to the displayed information affect this purchase order only. The
Vendor file and Ship From file are not changed.
From
The code and name of the vendor’s ship-from location.
03 Addr
04 Addr
05 Addr
06 Addr
The vendor’s ship from address.
07 City
The city in which the ship-from address is located.
State
The state in which the ship-from address is located.
08 Zip
The zip code of the ship-from address. Do not enter the dash.
PO - 60 FPD/203
HEADER MAINTENANCE (PO/PM)
![Page 61: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
Country
The country in which the ship-from address is located.
23 Phone 1
24 Phone 2
The phone numbers of the ship-from location.
26 Fax
The fax number of the ship-from location.
10 Ship To
The code and name of your warehouse location.
11 Addr
through
14 Addr
The address of the warehouse to which the items will be shipped.
15 City
The city in which the warehouse is located.
State
The state in which the warehouse is located.
16 Zip
The zip code of the warehouse address.
17 Phone
The phone number of the warehouse.
18 Frt Chg
The freight flag that is updated on the purchase order from Vendor
Maintenance (VM) and Ship From Maintenance (SFM).
25 Attn
The contact name defined in the Ship-From record is displayed. You can
accept this name by pressing RETURN or enter the name of the new
business contact.
The entry in this field affects this purchase order only, it does not change
the Ship-From Record.
26 Fax
The fax number of the ship-from location.
FPD/203 PO - 61
HEADER MAINTENANCE (PO/PM)
![Page 62: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
27 Terms
The default is the Terms Code entered in Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM).
Press RETURN to accept this entry or change it if necessary. If a change
is made, it is for this purchase order only; the Terms Code in the Vendor
Master file is not changed.
28 FOB
The default is the FOB Code entered in Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM).
Press RETURN to accept this entry or change it if necessary. If a change
is made, it is for this purchase order only; the FOB Code in the Vendor
Master File is not changed.
29 Via
The default is the Ship-Via Code entered in Vendor Maintenance
(PO/VM).
Press RETURN to accept this entry or change it if necessary. If a change
is made, it is for this purchase order only; the Via Code in the Vendor
Master File is not changed.
31 Disc 1
32 Disc 2
33 Disc 3
To subtract the discount amount from the price, do not enter a negative
sign. If a negative sign is entered in this field, the price will be increased
by the specified percent.
Enter percentages in decimals. For example, 10.00 = 10% discount.
34 Tax
Y = Tax is added when the purchase order total is calculated.
N = Tax is not added when the purchase order total is calculated.
Note: The tax % comes from SYS/CIS.
35 Ordered
Enter the date the order was placed, using the MMDDYY or
MMDDYYYY format.
36 Due
Enter the date the order is due, using the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY
format.
When exiting the program, you can change all or specific item due dates
to match the date entered.
PO - 62 FPD/203
HEADER MAINTENANCE (PO/PM)
![Page 63: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
37 Expedite
Enter the date (in MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format) when the
purchase order is to be expedited.
Note: The Purchase Order Listing program (PO/LIS) references the date
in this field when printing for a range of expedite dates.
The following fields are updated by the system and cannot be changed.
Vend
The vendor entered when this purchase order was created through the
Entry program (PO/PE).
From
The vendor Ship From entered when this purchase order was created in
the Entry program (PO/PE).
Remarks
The vendor remarks from the Vendor file at the time this purchase order
was entered through PO/PE.
Whse
The receiving warehouse entered when this purchase order was created
through the Entry program (PO/PE).
Ordered
The value of all items ordered on this purchase order.
Rec’d
The value of all items received to date on this purchase order.
Error Messages
P. O. Not on File - SKIP
The purchase order number entered is not on file.
Press SKIP and begin again.
Closed Status - SKIP to Continue
The purchase order number entered is closed; no changes can be made.
Press SKIP and either exit this program or enter another number.
FPD/203 PO - 63
HEADER MAINTENANCE (PO/PM)
![Page 64: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
Blanket Purchase Orders (PO/BPO)
A blanket purchase order is a sales agreement with your vendor that can include
special pricing, discounts, or terms. Once a blanket purchase order is set up, a
blanket purchase order release can be made to create a purchase order. Although
releases are usually created as shipments are to be received, they may be created
whenever necessary to show an inventoried item as having a quantity on order.
The quantity on the purchase order is defined by the minimum release quantity
set up on the blanket purchase order. This quantity may be changed if necessary.
The first step in using this module is to create your blanket purchase orders in
Blanket P.O. Entry/Maintenance (BPO/BPM). The Entry/Maintenance program
is similar to Purchase Order Entry (PO/PE) in that there are two screens; a
Header Screen and a Detail Screen. The Header Screen (screen 1) records the
vendor name, ship-to address, warehouse, and the start and end date of blanket
purchase order. The Detail Screen is used to assign items to the blanket PO Both
inventory and non-inventory items can be used when working with blanket
purchase orders.
Once your blanket purchase order has been set up, a release can be made using
Create Blanket PO Releases (BPO/BPC). Once a release is made, an actual
purchase order is created. Inventory quantities are updated just as they are when a
new purchase order is entered in Purchase Order Entry (PO/PE). The standard
PO programs should be used once the purchase order has been created from the
release. However, modifications to the release detail must be done in Blanket
Purchase Order Line Maintenance (BPO/BPR).
The Blanket P.O. Cancel, Blanket P.O. Listing, and Purge Blanket Purchase
Order programs can be used to cancel, view, print or purge the blanket purchase
order (not the PO created from the Blanket P.O.).
Purchase Order Cancel/Inquiry displays the total value, total ordered to date, and
the dollar amount of a blanket purchase order. This information is updated when
the blanket purchase order release is created.
Note: The total value of a blanket purchase order is calculated from the total
quantity and cost entered in Blanket Purchase Order Maintenance. This amount is
adjusted when a line’s quantity or cost is changed or a line is deleted.
The following programs are available from the Blanket Purchase Order module:
• Blanket PO Maintenance / Entry (BPO/BPM)
• Create Blanket PO Releases (BPO/BPC)
• Blanket PO Release Line Maintenance (BPO/BPR)
PO - 64 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 65: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
• Blanket PO Cancel / Inquiry (BPO/BCN)
• Blanket PO Listing (BPO/BPL)
• Purge Blanket Purchase Orders (BPO/BPD)
Programs Affected by Blanket Purchase Orders
Purchase Order Header Maintenance
Allows changes to the heading of a blanket purchase order release, as with a
standard purchase order (without affecting the Master Blanket Purchase Order
Record).
Purchase Order Line Maintenance
No modifications allowed to blanket purchase order release detail. Modifications
can only be done in Blanket Purchase Order Line Maintenance.
Purchase Order Cancel
If a blanket purchase order release is canceled, the quantity ordered to date will
be adjusted on the blanket purchase order. The release ID is still considered used
and will not be used again.
Receiving With A Purchase Order
Updates the blanket purchase order total quantity received and quantity ordered
to date. All modifications allowed on a purchase order may be done to a blanket
purchase order. These changes affect this release only.
Low Stock Report
Allows information from blanket purchase orders to be included on this report.
Purchasing Action Report
Allows information from blanket purchase orders to be included on this report.
FPD/203 PO - 65
PROGRAMS AFFECTED BY BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS
![Page 66: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
Terms
Blanket PO Min Release Quantity—The quantity that is to be updated to the
purchase order when a blanket purchase order release is made. This quantity may
be modified on the release.
Blanket PO Minimum Release Amount—The amount entered for the
minimum release amount will become the minimum order amount on each
blanket purchase release created.
Blanket PO Release ID—All blanket purchase orders have a PO number
beginning with the letter B. A four digit number is then assigned by the system
for each new blanket purchase order created. As each blanket purchase order
release is created, a letter is assigned as the release ID. This letter can be A
through Z in uppercase or a through z in lowercase. The system assigns the
letters alphabetically, beginning with uppercase letters. Once the uppercase Z has
been assigned, the system begins assigning the lowercase letters. This letter is
added to the end of the blanket PO number. Once the Release ID of lowercase z
is used, no more releases can be created for this blanket PO. Once a Release ID is
used, it cannot be used again.
A PO may begin with the letter B and not be a blanket purchase order. However,
a standard purchase order cannot begin with a B and end with an alpha character.
This combination is reserved for blanket purchase orders only.
Blanket PO Total Value—The total value of the blanket purchase order,
calculated from the total quantity and cost entered in Blanket Purchase Order
Maintenance. This amount is adjusted when a line’s quantity or cost is changed
or a line is deleted.
BPO Received Quantity—The total quantity received through Receiving With a
purchase order for all releases created from the blanket purchase order.
PO Vendor—In order for purchase orders to be created for a vendor, they must
be set up in Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM) as a PO Vendor.
PO - 66 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 67: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
Blanket P.O. Entry/Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPM)
Blanket P.O. Entry/Maintenance is used to create, modify, and optionally print
blanket purchase orders. This program is similar to Purchase Order Entry
(PO/PE) in that there are two screens, a Header Screen and a Detail Screen.
The Header (first) screen is used to enter the header information. After the
vendor, ship-from location, and warehouse are specified, some of the fields on
the Header Screen defaults come from the Vendor Maintenance, Vendor Ship
From Maintenance, and the Warehouse Master records. These entries can be
accepted or changed. As with Purchase Order Entry (PO/PE), all vendors must be
set up as PO Vendors in the Vendor file and cannot be on HOLD status.
After the header information has been entered and accepted, the blanket PO
number is automatically assigned by the system. All blanket purchase orders
have a PO number beginning with the letter B and a four-digit number assigned
sequentially by the system.
The Detail (second) screen is used to assign items to the blanket purchase order.
Inventoried and non-inventoried items can be entered on blanket purchase orders.
Up to nine lines of notes can be entered for each item.
Header Screen
FPD/203 PO - 67
BLANKET P.O. ENTRY/MAINTENANCE (PO/BPO/BPM)
![Page 68: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
Field Explanation
P.O.
To view/modify an existing blanket PO, enter the purchase order
number.
To access the PO number using the function keys, enter the first
character of the number (after the B) and press F1. Once a valid PO
number is displayed, press F3 to scroll forward and F4 to scroll back
through the existing PO numbers.
Press RETURN to select the displayed number.
To enter a new blanket purchase order, enter NEW. The system assigns
the next available PO number in Blanket Purchase Order Maintenance.
To verify that there are no duplicates when you assign a new PO number,
enter the number and press F10. This allows you to enter a new PO
number without the system assigning one.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP.
Note: All blanket purchase order numbers begin with the letter B. This
letter is not entered in the blanket purchase order programs, but must be
entered in standard Purchase Order programs in order to access all
purchase orders that have been created from a blanket purchase order.
Error Messages:
Blanket P.O. Not On File….SKIP
The blanket purchase order Number cannot be found in Blanket
Purchase Order Maintenance.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Closed Status On This P.O….SKIP
This PO has been received complete. No modifications can be made
to this order.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message.
Enter another PO number or exit the program.
Not A Blanket Purchase Order…SKIP
The entered PO number was found in the Purchase Order file, but
was not created from a blanket purchase order. Any modifications
necessary must be done in Purchase Order Maintenance (PO/PM) or
Purchase Order Line Maintenance (PO/PL).
PO - 68 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 69: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
The cursor moves through the following fields only if you are creating
a new blanket purchase order.
If you are modifying an existing blanket PO, the cursor moves directly to the
SELECT field.
Vend
Enter a PO vendor that has been set up in Vendor Maintenance
(PO/VM).
To access the list of valid PO Vendors, use the function keys or the CMD
Window. To locate the vendor using the function keys, enter the first
character of the vendor name or number and press the appropriate
function key (F1 or F2). After a valid vendor is displayed, press F3 to
scroll forward and F4 to scroll backward through the list. To select the
displayed vendor, press RETURN.
To access the list of valid PO Vendors using the CMD Window, press
CMD-L (lookup). Use the arrow keys to scroll up and down the list.
To select the highlighted vendor, press RETURN.
Note: A message displays indicating if the vendor is defined as a foreign
currency vendor.
Error Messages:
Vendor Not Set Up As A P.O. Vendor
purchase orders can only be entered for those vendors set up as PO
Vendors and this vendor is not a PO Vendor.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message.
Enter another vendor number or define this vendor as a PO Vendor
in Vendor Maintenance.
Vendor On Hold, Can Not Enter P.O. … SKIP
This vendor has an “on-hold” status. purchase orders cannot be
entered for vendors that are on hold.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and enter another vendor.
From
Enter a valid ship-from location that has been set up in Vendor Ship
From Maintenance.
To use the address in Vendor Maintenance, enter SAME.
You can use the function keys or the CMD Window to locate the
ship-from location for this vendor. To access the list of valid ship-from
locations using the function keys, enter the first character of a known
ship-from and press F1. Once a valid ship-from location displays, press
F3 to scroll forward and F4 to scroll backward through the list. To select
the displayed location, press RETURN.
FPD/203 PO - 69
BLANKET P.O. ENTRY/MAINTENANCE (PO/BPO/BPM)
![Page 70: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
To access the list of valid ship-from locations using the CMD Window,
press CMD-L (lookup). Use the arrow keys to scroll up and down the
list.
To select the highlighted ship-from location, press RETURN.
Press F6 to access the Notes/Messages system, from where you can view
all notes created for this vendor. This does not access vendor group
notes.
Error Messages:
End of File…SKIP
You have reached the end of the Ship-From File while scrolling
through the list of locations.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Invalid Entry or Function….SKIP
Either an invalid Ship-From was entered in this field or the wrong
function key was pressed.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
09 Whse
Enter a valid warehouse number or use the CMD Window to locate the
warehouse. If a valid warehouse is entered, the address in Warehouse
Maintenance will be displayed for the ship-to address.
If a warehouse number is not entered, or has not been defined in
Warehouse Maintenance, the System Company address will be
displayed.
Error Messages:
Invalid Warehouse Or Warehouse Not Available
The entered warehouse number is not valid or is not available at this
time.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.Warehouse
Address Not Found
The warehouse number entered has not been defined in Warehouse
Maintenance.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
21 Attn
The contact name set up in Vendor Maintenance is displayed. You can
accept this name by pressing RETURN or enter another contact name.
PO - 70 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 71: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
23 Terms
The Terms Code entered in Vendor Maintenance is displayed. You can
accept this entry or change it.
24 FOB
The FOB Code entered in Vendor Maintenance is displayed. You can
accept this entry or change it.
25 Via
The Via Code entered in Vendor Maintenance is displayed. You can
accept this entry or change it.
Note: When modifying the Terms, FOB, or Via fields on an order, the
description, not the code, is entered.
26 Min Rel
The amount entered in this field will become the Minimum Order
amount on each blanket purchase order release created.
27 Disc1
28 Disc2
29 Disc3
The defaults come from the discount amount entered in Vendor
Maintenance. The displayed figures represent percentages. For example:
10.00 = 10% discount.
The discounts entered on the Header Record will display for each item
added to an order. Changing the Header Record of an order does not
affect any existing lines on the order, it is only used to prompt the
discount amounts on new lines added.
30 Tax
Y = Tax is charged by this vendor.
N = Tax is not charged by this vendor.
31 Start
32 End
The Start and End fields default to the sign on date. This date range
indicates the time period for which this blanket purchase order is valid.
When creating a blanket purchase order release, a message displays,
indicating if the sign on date is after the end date.
Note: When printing a listing with a specified date range, these are the
dates checked.
FPD/203 PO - 71
BLANKET P.O. ENTRY/MAINTENANCE (PO/BPO/BPM)
![Page 72: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
33 Frt Chg
The freight flag that is updated on the purchase order from Vendor
Maintenance (VM) and Ship From Maintenance (SFM). It can be
changed for this blanket PO.
18 Comment
Enter a comment or press F1 to insert the “Remark” from Vendor
Maintenance.
F6 accesses the Notes/Message system, from where you can view all
notes for the vendor code entered. This does not access vendor group
notes.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field you want to change.
To accept all information as displayed, leave this field blank and press
RETURN.
Continue (Y/N)
This question is displayed if this is a new blanket purchase order.
Y = Displays the Detail screen. The blanket purchase order number is
assigned and the Header is created.
N = Exits and aborts creating this new blanket purchase order.
PO - 72 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 73: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
Detail Screen
The inventory information entered on the first screen for the item and warehouse
is displayed on this screen.
Field Explanation
Enter Function: A-Add, C-Change/ Delete, SKIP to Exit
A = Add an item to this blanket PO.
C = Change or delete an existing line on this blanket PO.
Press SKIP to exit this program.
Note: If this is a new blanket purchase order release and no items were
updated to this release (you pressed SKIP), the Header Record is still
created and the Release ID is used.
The cursor moves through the following fields only if the Change
option was selected.
Line
Enter the line number you wish to change/delete.
Error Message:
No Record Exists For This Line Number
The line number entered does not exist on this blanket purchase
order.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and enter another line
number or press SKIP to exit.
FPD/203 PO - 73
BLANKET P.O. ENTRY/MAINTENANCE (PO/BPO/BPM)
![Page 74: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
SELECT
Enter the field number of the entry to change.
To delete this entire line from the blanket PO, enter DE.
To update the notes for this line, enter NO.
The cursor moves through the following fields only if the Add option
was selected.
Item
Enter the item number to add to this blanket PO. The function keys may
be used to access an item.
Enter the first character of either the item number or shortname and press
the appropriate function key (F1 or F2). When a valid item is displayed,
press F3 to display the following item and F4 to redisplaythe previous
item.
Press RETURN to accept the displayed item.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry or Function…SKIP
Either an invalid item number was entered or the wrong function key
was pressed.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
08 Qty
Enter the total quantity for the duration of this blanket purchase order.
Press F8 to enter the item quantity and cost using a unit of measure other
than the unit of measure in Inventory Maintenance. See the Introduction
to Purchasing for a detailed explanation of the F8 function.
Note: This function key can be used in the Quantity, Price, and Cost
fields.
09 Cost
The cost for the duration of the blanket purchase order. The cost can be
modified on each release created and during Receiving.
10 Um
The unit of measure is displayed for inventoried items.
To change the UM when entering or modifying orders, the F8-UM
Conversion option should be used.
Any unit of measure can be entered for a non-inventoried item. The
quantity and price (cost) are then entered based on this unit of measure.
PO - 74 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 75: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
11 Disc
12 Disc
13 Disc
The discount amounts entered on the first screen are displayed in the
three Disc fields. The displayed figures represent percentages. For
example: 10.00 = 10% discount.
Ext
Extensions are calculated as:
quantity x price (or cost)/unit of measure value
16 Loc
If a location is entered in this field, it will be updated to the PO.
If the location is blank and a blanket purchase order release is created,
the location updated to the Purchase is determined by the Purchase Order
Specification Default Location and Warehouse Specifications Default
Receiving Location.
If no warehouse has been entered for this blanket purchase order,
locations will not be validated, regardless of the setting in the “Validate
Locations” field of Warehouse Specifications (SYS/WCS).
Error Message:
Invalid Stock/Bin Location …SKIP
An invalid location has been entered.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
17 Order
Enter a valid customer order and line number to which this entire line
will be committed.
Leave this field blank if you do not want to commit this line to a specific
customer order. For blanket purchase orders entered with no warehouse,
this field must be left blank.
We recommend that only the amount entered on the customer order be
entered on this line. If a larger quantity has been purchased, then the
balance would be entered as an additional line on this order.
This eliminates the problem of receiving the line and forgetting to
un-commit the balance of this purchase, leaving it unavailable to any
other order.
Error Messages:
Cust Order and Line Not For This Whse…SKIP
The customer order and line number entered are not valid in this
warehouse.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
FPD/203 PO - 75
BLANKET P.O. ENTRY/MAINTENANCE (PO/BPO/BPM)
![Page 76: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
Cust Order and Line Not Found…SKIP
An open order does not exist with the line number entered.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Cust Order and Line Not Found For This Item…SKIP
The item on this Purchase order is not the same item found on the
customer order and line entered.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
This Item Cannot Be Going Both To Rework And To A Customer
Order…SKIP
The rework flag is set to Y and a customer and line have been
specified.
Either clear the customer order and line or set the rework flag for this
item to N.
18 Comm
A comment may be entered in this field, but it is not required. The
comment prints on the right side of the purchase order.
30 Min Rel
The minimum release quantity is updated to the purchase order when a
blanket purchase order release is made. This quantity may be modified
on the release.
Error Messages:
Release Quantity Cannot Be > Total BPO Quantity…SKIP
The minimum release quantity entered is larger than the quantity for
this blanket purchase order.
Press SKIP to re-enter the minimum release quantity.
Release Quantity is Zero…Correct? (Y/N)
This question is displayed if zero is entered as the release quantity.
The line cannot be updated to a purchase order when the quantity is
zero.
If no more releases are to be created for this line, the line should
either be deleted or the total quantity adjusted, so that it equals the
ordered to date.
35 Tax
Y = Tax is charged on this item.
N = Tax is not charged on this item.
PO - 76 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 77: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
36 Rework
Y = This item is to be sent to rework upon receipt.
N = No rework is to be done on this item.
37 Frt Chg
The freight flag that is updated on the purchase order from Vendor
Maintenance (VM) and Ship From Maintenance (SFM). It can be
changed for this blanket PO.
SELECT
Enter the field number of the entry to modify.
To accept the line detail as displayed, press RETURN.
Do You Want To Insert Notes? (Y/N)
Up to nine note lines can be created for each item on a purchase order or
blanket purchase order.
Note: If you are adding note lines to a blanket purchase order, remember
that the automatic note lines created from cross-reference notes found for
this vendor and item will be updated when a blanket purchase order
release is created. If these notes are created and 9 notes exist, the
cross-reference note is updated first, followed by as many of these notes
as possible.
Print Purchase Order Now (Y/N)?
This question is displayed after you enter or modify a PO.
Y = Print the purchase order.
N = Do not print the purchase order.
Note: Field 11 in SYS/POS must be set to Y for this question to be
displayed.
FPD/203 PO - 77
BLANKET P.O. ENTRY/MAINTENANCE (PO/BPO/BPM)
![Page 78: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
Create Blanket P.O. Releases (PO/BPO/BPC)
The Create Blanket P.O. Releases program is used to create and modify releases
from a specified blanket purchase order. Once a release is made, an actual
purchase order is created. Inventory quantities are updated just as they are when a
new purchase order is entered in Purchase Order Entry (PO/PE).
Although releases are usually created as shipments are to be received, you can
create them when necessary to show an inventoried item as having a quantity on
order. The quantity on the purchase order is defined by the minimum release
quantity set up on the blanket purchase order. You can change this quantity if
necessary.
The standard Purchasing and Receiving programs should be used once the
release has been created.
Entry/Inquiry Screen One
The default field entries are from the blanket purchase order, and can be changed.
FPD/203 PO - 78
CREATE BLANKET P.O. RELEASES (PO/BPO/BPC)
![Page 79: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
Field Explanation
P.O.
Enter the blanket purchase order number from which you want to
create/modify a release.
To access the PO number using the function keys, enter the first
character of the number (after the B) and press F1. Once a valid PO
number is displayed, press F3 to scroll forward and F4 to scroll back
through the existing PO numbers. Press RETURN to select the displayed
number.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP.
Note: once a valid blanket PO number is accepted, the last Release ID
created is displayed.
Error Messages:
Blanket P.O. Ending Date of xx/xx/xx Exceeded? Continue? (Y/N)
The sign on date is after the End Date of the blanket PO number
entered.
Y = Continue creating a release for this blanket purchase order.
N = Enter another blanket purchase order Number.
Blanket P.O. Not On File…SKIP
This blanket PO number does not exist.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Closed Status On This P.O…SKIP
This PO has been received complete.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
End of File….SKIP
You have reached the end of the file while scrolling through the list
of POs.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Not A Blanket Purchase Order…SKIP
The PO number entered was found in the Purchase Order file, but
was not created from a blanket purchase order.
Release
To modify the heading information of an existing release, enter the ID.
To create a new release, enter 0 (zero).
FPD/203 PO - 79
CREATE BLANKET P.O. RELEASES (PO/BPO/BPC)
![Page 80: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
Note: To modify the detail of a blanket purchase order, you must use
Blanket PO Release Line Maintenance (BPO/BPR).
Error Messages:
No Further Releases Allowed…SKIP
The last Release ID is ‘z’. No more releases may be created from this
blanket PO.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
P.O. Not On File… SKIP
The Release ID entered does not exist for this blanket PO.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
The cursor moves through the following fields only if a new release is
being created.
If you are modifying an existing release, the cursor moves directly to the
SELECT field.
Whse
The warehouse entered on the blanket purchase order is displayed. When
creating a release, a valid warehouse must be entered.
You can use the CMD-L function to access the list of valid warehouses.
Error Message:
Invalid Warehouse Or Warehouse Not Available
The warehouse number entered is not valid or not available at this
time.
Enter a valid warehouse number from Warehouse Maintenance
(PO/POM/WAM) or press SKIP to acknowledge this message and
begin again.
From
To use the ship-from address entered in the blanket PO, press RETURN.
To access the list of valid ship-from locations, press CMD-L and use the
appropriate arrow and function keys to select one from the list.
Press F6 to access the Notes/Messages system, from where you can view
all notes created for this vendor. This does not access vendor group
notes.
PO - 80 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 81: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
Error Messages:
End of File… SKIP
You have reached the end of the Ship-From File while scrolling
through the list of locations.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Invalid Entry or Function … SKIP
Either an invalid Ship-From was entered in this field or the wrong
function key was pressed.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Attn
The contact name entered in the blanket PO is displayed. You can accept
this name by pressing RETURN or enter another contact name.
Terms
Terms, Fob, and Via are the descriptions found in System Code
Maintenance for the code in Vendor Maintenance. When modifying
these fields on an order, the description, not the code is entered.
FOB
Terms, Fob, and Via are the descriptions found in System Code
Maintenance for the code in Vendor Maintenance. When modifying
these fields on an order, the description, not the code is entered.
Via
Terms, Fob, and Via are the descriptions found in System Code
Maintenance for the code in Vendor Maintenance. When modifying
these fields on an order, the description, not the code is entered.
Disc 1
Disc 2
Disc 3
Disc 1, Disc 2, and Disc 3 default to the discount amount entered in the
blanket purchase order. The displayed figures represent percentages. For
example: 10.00 = 10%.
Tax
Y = Tax is charged by this vendor
N = Tax is not charged by this vendor
Ordered
The sign on date is displayed.
Enter the order date of the purchase order you are creating. The date
must be entered in the standard MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format.
FPD/203 PO - 81
CREATE BLANKET P.O. RELEASES (PO/BPO/BPC)
![Page 82: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
Due
The date entered in the Ordered field is displayed.
Enter the date the items on the purchase order are due. The date must be
entered in the standard MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format.
Comment
The comment from the blanket purchase order is displayed.
To insert the “Remark” from Vendor Maintenance, press F1.
To view all notes for this vendor, press F6.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field entry you want to change.
To accept all information as displayed, leave this field blank and press
RETURN.
Continue (Y/N) is displayed if a new release is being created.
Y = Continue creating this blanket PO release and access the Detail
Screen.
N = Exit this program. No release is created.
Update Item Due Date - All Items, Only Due Date = Orig Date, No Items?
(A/O/N)
This field is displayed if the header due date on an existing order is
modified.
A = Change all detail line items on this purchase order to the due date
entered.
O = Change the detail lines whose current due date was the same as the
header due date before the modification was made.
N = Do not change any detail lines. Only the Heading of the order will be
changed.
PO - 82 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 83: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
Screen Two
Field Explanation
Release All Items? (Y or N)
Y = Create a release for all items on the specified blanket purchase order.
N = Specify the items from the blanket purchase order to release.
Note: If N is entered in this field, the cursor moves through each of the
item detail fields, allowing you to make changes to the item information.
Field explanations are listed in the Blanket PO Entry/ Maintenance
(BPO/BPM) section.
For Due Date
The due date entered on screen one is displayed. You can accept this date
or change it.
Print Label Now?
Y = Print tag labels now.
Do You Want To Print A Test Pattern? (Y/N)
Y = Print a test pattern before printing the tag labels.
Number Of Tag Copies To Print - Include Original
Enter the number of tag labels to print. You are given the option to
change printer type and device.
FPD/203 PO - 83
CREATE BLANKET P.O. RELEASES (PO/BPO/BPC)
![Page 84: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
Blanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance(PO/BPO/BPR)
Blanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance is used to add, change or delete a line
item on a blanket PO release.
An asterisk (*) next to the on order or committed quantity indicates some or all
of the quantity was found in processing, rework, or transfers.
When adding an item, you may accept or change the field entries as the cursor
moves through each field. When changing a field entry of an item currently on
the release, simply enter the line number of the field to be changed.
Once all the changes have been made to the release, the standard Purchasing and
Receiving programs should be used.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
P.O.
Enter a valid blanket purchase order number.
You can use the CMD Window to access the list of valid blanket
purchase order numbers. Press CMD-L. Use the arrow keys to move up
and down the list. To select the highlighted number, press RETURN.
PO - 84 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 85: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
Error Messages:
Blanket P.O. Ending Date of xx/xx/xx Exceeded? Continue? (Y/N)
The sign on date is after the End Date of the blanket purchase order
number entered.
Y = Continue creating a release for this blanket purchase order.
N = Enter another blanket purchase order Number.
Blanket P.O. Not On File…SKIP
This blanket purchase order number does not exist.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Closed Status On This P.O…SKIP
This PO has been received complete.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
End of File….SKIP
You have reached the end of the file while scrolling through the list
of P.O.s.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Not A Blanket Purchase Order…SKIP
The PO number entered was found in the Purchase Order file, but
was not created from a blanket purchase order.
P.O. Cannot Be Entered Until Monthly Update Is Run….SKIP
The month and year you are signed on to is greater than the current
inventory month and year.
Press SKIP to sign on to last month and run Monthly Update. If
Monthly Update is to be run, be sure all of the previous month has
been completed and all reports are run before running this program.
Created purchase orders are updated to Purchase Order History for
the current month and year and therefore you must be signed on to
the current month and year to add detail to a purchase order.
Release
Enter the release ID to modify.
Error Messages:
No Further Releases Allowed…SKIP
The last release ID is ‘z’. No more releases may be created from this
blanket purchase order.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
FPD/203 PO - 85
BLANKET P.O. RELEASE LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/BPO/BPR)
![Page 86: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
P.O. Not On File… SKIP
The release ID entered does not exist for this blanket purchase order.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Receipts Started
Receiving has begun on this purchase order. Only the due date can
be modified.
Enter Function: A-Add, C-Change/ Delete, SKIP to Exit
A = Add an item to this blanket PO release.
C = Change or delete an existing line on this release.
SKIP = Exit this program.
The cursor moves through the following two fields only if you selected
the Change option (C).
Line
Enter the line number you wish to change/delete.
Error Message:
Blanket P.O. Detail Record Not Found…SKIP
The line number entered was not found on this blanket purchase
order release.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message.
Buying History Record Not Found
The tag record was not found for this purchase order, or the tag
record is incorrect. The tag record must be a status 1, have the same
vendor number, P.O. and line number, warehouse, and item as found
on this purchase order. This must be corrected before any receipt or
modifications can be done to this line. The tag record can be found in
Buy History Maintenance, or a new tag may be created in Tag
Maintenance.
No Record Exists For This Line Number
The line number entered does not exist on this blanket purchase
order.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and enter another line
number or press SKIP to exit.
This PO Line Has A Closed Status…SKIP
The line number entered has been received complete. You cannot
make changes.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message.
PO - 86 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 87: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
SELECT
Enter the field number of the entry to change.
DE = To delete this entire line from the release.
NO = To update the notes for this line.
The cursor moves through the following fields only if you selected the
Add option (A).
Item
Enter the item number to add to this Blanket P.O. Release.
The function keys may be used to access the item. Enter the first
character of either the item number or shortname and press the
appropriate function key (F1 to access the first item beginning with the
item number entered, F2 to access the first item beginning with the
shortname character entered). Once a valid item is displayed, press F3 to
display the following item and F4 to redisplaythe previous item. Press
RETURN to accept the displayed item.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry or Function …SKIP
Either an invalid item number was entered or the wrong function key
was pressed.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Qty
Enter the total item quantity wanted for this PO
Error Message:
Order Quantity Exceeds Blanket PO Balance, Continue? (Y/N)
The quantity being ordered is greater than the balance left on this
Blanket Purchase Order Line.
Y = Add this line to the purchase order.
N = Exit and re-enter another line.
Cost
Enter the cost of this item for this release.
UM
The unit of measure is displayed.
FPD/203 PO - 87
BLANKET P.O. RELEASE LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/BPO/BPR)
![Page 88: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
Disc
Enter the discounts applicable for this release.
Note: The displayed figures represent percentages. For example: 10.00 =
10% discount.
Ext
Extensions are calculated as:
quantity x price (or cost)/unit of measure value
Due Date
Enter the date this item is due to be received.
Loc
Enter the location of this item in your warehouse.
If a warehouse was not entered for this Blanket P.O., the location will not
be validated, regardless of the setting in the “Validate Locations” field of
Warehouse Specifications (SYS/WCS).
Error Message:
Invalid Stock/Bin Location…SKIP
An invalid location has been entered.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Order
Enter a valid customer order and line number to which this entire line
will be committed.
Leave this field blank if you do not want to commit this line to a specific
customer order. For blanket purchase orders entered with no warehouse,
this field must be left blank.
We recommend that only the amount entered on the customer order be
entered on this line. If a larger quantity has been purchased, then the
balance would be entered as an additional line on this order. This
eliminates the problem of receiving the line and forgetting to un-commit
the balance of this purchase - leaving it unavailable to any other order.
Error Messages:
Cust Order and Line Not For This Whse…SKIP
The customer order and line number entered are not valid in this
warehouse.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
PO - 88 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 89: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
Cust Order and Line Not Found…SKIP
An open order does not exist with the line number entered.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Cust Order and Line Not Found For This Item… SKIP
The item on this purchase order is not the same item found on the
customer order and line entered.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
This Item Cannot Be Going Both To Rework And To A Customer
Order…SKIP
The rework flag is set to Y and a customer and line have been
specified.
Either clear the customer order and line or set the rework flag for this
item to N.
Comm
A comment may be entered in this field, but it is not required. The
comment prints on the right side of the purchase order.
Tax
Y = Tax is charged on this item.
Rework
Y = This item is to be sent to rework upon receipt.
N = No rework is to be done on this item.
SELECT
Enter the field number of the entry to modify.
To accept the line detail as displayed, press RETURN.
Do You Want To Print A Test Pattern? (Y/N)
Y = Print a test pattern before printing the purchase order.
Number Of Tag Copies To Print - Include Original
Enter the number of Tag labels to print.
Print Tags Now?
This field is displayed only if the System Label Interface Specification is
flagged to ask if labels are to be printed when a purchase order is
entered, and the Label Type is I.
Y = Print the tag labels.
FPD/203 PO - 89
BLANKET P.O. RELEASE LINE MAINTENANCE (PO/BPO/BPR)
![Page 90: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
Set For Delayed Print?
This field is displayed only if the System Label Interface Specification is
flagged to ask if labels are to be printed when a purchase order is
entered, and the Label Type is D.
Y = Update the Tag Print File for printing when “All Eligible” is
selected.
Print Label Now?
This field is displayed only if the System Label Interface Specification is
flagged to ask if labels are to be printed when a purchase order is
entered, and the Label Type is B, C, or K.
Y = Print the labels now.
Do You Want To Insert Notes? (Y/N)
Up to nine note lines can be created for each item on a purchase order or
blanket purchase order.
Note: If adding note lines to a blanket purchase order, remember that the
automatic note lines created from cross-reference notes found for this
vendor and item will be updated when a blanket purchase order release is
created. If these notes are created and 9 notes exist, the cross-reference
note is updated first, followed by as many of these notes as possible (up
to 9).
Only Notes Changed…Flag P.O. To Be Reprinted? (Y/N)
This message is displayed if only the notes were modified on this release.
Y = Flag this PO to be reprinted when all eligible POs are printed
(PO/PP).
Update Replacement Cost With the Cost Of This Item? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the price in the Cost field does not equal
the current replacement cost in Inventory Maintenance and the System
Purchase Order Specification to Update Replacement Costs is set to ask
(A) whether or not to update the replacement cost.
Y = Update the replacement cost in Inventory Maintenance with the cost
on this purchase order line.
Update History With This Change? (Y/N)
Y = Update P.O. History Maintenance with the modifications and
additions to this release.
PO - 90 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 91: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry (PO/BPO/BCN)
Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry is used to display blanket purchase order
information and/or cancel a blanket purchase order.
Once a valid blanket purchase order Number is entered, the line item information
displays, including: the UM, cost, and remaining balance. The start and end date
of the blanket purchase order, the total value of blanket purchase order, and the
total quantity released also is displayed.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
P.O.
Enter the blanket purchase order Number to view and/or cancel.
X - Cancel Order, M - More Lines
X = Cancel this order.
M is displayed only if there are more line items than can be displayed on
one screen.
M = Display more lines.
Press SKIP to return the cursor to the P.O. field.
FPD/203 PO - 91
BLANKET P.O. CANCEL/INQUIRY (PO/BPO/BCN)
![Page 92: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
Error Messages
No Record Exists For This PO Number
The PO number entered was not found in the Blanket Purchase Order
file.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Open Purchase Order Found, Cannot Delete Blanket P.O. SKIP
There is an open purchase order for this blanket purchase order. The
purchase order must be canceled in Purchase Order Cancel
(PO/POM/CAN) or received complete in Receiving With A Purchase
Order before this Blanket P.O. can be deleted.
PO - 92 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 93: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
Blanket P.O. Listing (PO/BPO/BPL)
Blanket P.O. Listing can be used to print a list of blanket purchase orders or
purchase order forms.
Listing Screen
Field Explanation
Listing or Form? (L/F)
L = Print a blanket purchase order Listing
F = Print a purchase order Form. Another screen will be displayed.
The following fields apply only if you entered L in the Listing or Form
field.
Whse
Enter the warehouse number for which to print the Blanket Purchase
Order Listing.
Print From Start Date
Thru End Date
The start and end date indicate the time period for which the blanket
purchase order is valid.
Enter the date range of the blanket purchase orders to include on the
listing.
FPD/203 PO - 93
BLANKET P.O. LISTING (PO/BPO/BPL)
![Page 94: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
Print Whole File? (Y/N)
Y = Print all orders that meet the specified parameters.
N = Print only those orders that meet the specified parameters and fall
within the range to be identified.
Select Print Sequence
Select the sequence in which to print the Listing:
PO/Line = orders print in numeric sequence. All detail lines print in line
number sequence within each blanket purchase order. If the whole file is
not being printed, enter the range of order numbers to include on the
listing.
PO/Item = orders print in numeric sequence. All detail lines print in item
number sequence within each order. If the whole file is not being printed,
enter the range of order numbers to include on the listing.
Vendor/PO/Line = vendors are printed in numeric sequence. Orders
print in numeric sequence for each vendor. All detail lines print in line
number sequence within each order. If the whole file is not being printed,
enter the range of vendor numbers to include on the listing.
Vendor/PO/Item = vendors are printed in numeric sequence. Orders
print in numeric sequence for each vendor. All detail lines print in item
number sequence within each order. If the whole file is not being printed,
enter the rang e of vendor numbers to include on the listing.
Vendor/Item/PO = vendors are printed in numeric sequence. Order
information is printed for each vendor in item number sequence and in
order number sequence within each item number. If the whole file is not
being printed, enter the range of vendor numbers to include on the
listing.
Item/PO = Item numbers print in numeric sequence. Order information
prints in numeric sequence within each item number. If the whole file is
not being printed, enter the range of item numbers to include on the
listing.
Item/Vendor = Item numbers print in numeric sequence. Orders are
listed for each item in vendor sequence. If the whole file is not being
printed, enter the range of item numbers to include on the listing.
Any Changes?
Y = Change one or all of the displayed entries.
N = Accept the entries as displayed.
Continue? (Y/N)
Y = Print the listing as specified.
N = Exit this program without printing the listing.
PO - 94 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 95: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
Form Screen
Field Explanation
WHSE
Enter the warehouse number from which to print the purchase orders.
Error Message:
Invalid Warehouse Number…SKIP To Reenter
The warehouse number entered was not found in the Warehouse
Master File.
Enter a valid warehouse number that has been set up in Warehouse
Maintenance.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
Print All Eligible Orders (Y/N)?
Y = Print those orders that have not yet been printed. The status is not P.
For orders with a status of D, “Line Changed” prints in the heading. For
orders with a status of H, “Heading Changed” prints in the heading.
N = Print the range of orders to be identified, regardless of the print
status.
Print From PO No.
Print Thru PO No.
These fields are displayed only if you are not printing All Eligible Orders
Enter the range of purchase order numbers to print.
FPD/203 PO - 95
BLANKET P.O. LISTING (PO/BPO/BPL)
![Page 96: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
Print To (P/F/X/E/D)
P = Print the plain paper version of the order. This option uses the
Purchase Order Printer Assignment.
F = Print blanket purchase orders on the purchase order Form. This
option uses the purchase order Assignment. The blanket purchase order
end date prints in the date wanted box at the end of the form. The item’s
print no due date since due dates are not entered per item until the release
is created. The start date prints in the date of order box on the top of the
form.
X = Fax only. No internal notes or zero balance lines will be printed.
Note: Once printed or faxed, the order status is set to P (Printed).
E = Send the blanket purchase orders to the vendor’s e-mail address
specified in POM/SFM or AP/MAR/VM. If an e-mail address cannot be
found, you are prompted to enter one.
D = Send the blanket purchase orders to the Default output devices
specified in POM/SFM or AP/MAR/VM. If output devices have not been
specified, you are prompted to enter one or more.
Note: You can specify more than one Default device, such as Form and
E-mail. However, you cannot specify more than one printer device (such
as Plain paper and Form) at the same time.
CONTINUE? (Y/N)
Y = Print the form as specified.
N = Exit the program without printing the form.
Test Pattern? (Y/N)
Y = Print a test pattern to allow for aligning forms before printing actual
orders. This option will continue to be asked until N is entered.
N = Do not print a test pattern.
Note: If this option did not display, there were no eligible orders to be
printed, or none were found within the selected range.
PO - 96 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 97: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
Sample Report
FPD/203 PO - 97
BLANKET P.O. LISTING (PO/BPO/BPL)
COMPANY: 10 Best Fasteners, Inc. PAGE 1
RUN ID: LIS BLANKET PURCHASE ORDER LISTING 07/10/96
RUN BY: WPD 14:45:46 12/10/96
BY PO/LINE
START END COMMIT ON ORDR SHIP TO
DATE DATE LINE QTY QTY BALANCE RECEIVED COST UM RWK EXT COST SHIP VIA
================================================================================================================================
B0001 U.S. FASTENER PRODUCTS 800-831-3830
07/10/96 12/10/96 01 A & B BOLT &
SUPPLY
25C25HCS5Z 1/4-20 X 1/4 HEX C/S GR 5 ZINC C
001 250000 0 250000 195000 1.16 C 2900.00
******TOTAL LISTED FOR P.O. B0001 COST = 2900.00
******TOTAL LISTED FOR ALL COST = 2900.00
![Page 98: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
Purge Blanket Purchase Orders (PO/BPO/BPD)
Purge Blanket Purchase Orders is used to delete blanket purchase orders and/or
blanket purchase order detail from the Master File. You have the option of
deleting the blanket purchase order if all lines have been received complete or
deleting all detail received complete.
The Blanket Purchase Order Header Record will not be deleted unless all detail
on the Blanket P.O. has been deleted.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Delete Blanket PO’s Ending Prior to:
Enter the date through which the blanket purchase orders are to be
deleted. Any blanket purchase order with an end date greater than the
date entered will not be deleted, nor will any of its detail be deleted.
Delete Blanket PO’s WITHOUT regard to quantities received?
Y = Delete all detail.
N = Delete blanket POs only if all lines have been received complete. If
the total quantity ordered is greater than received, the line will not be
deleted.
Continue? (Y/N)
Y = Delete blanket POs as specified.
N = Exit the program without deleting blanket POs or detail.
PO - 98 FPD/203
BLANKET PURCHASE ORDERS (PO/BPO)
![Page 99: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
Print (PO/PP)
Use this program to print purchase orders that were created in the Purchase Order
Entry (PO/PE) and Create Preliminary Purchase Orders (PO/CPP) programs, or
changed in the Purchase Order Maintenance (PO/PM) or the Purchase Order Line
Maintenance (PO/PL) programs. This is an optional program; purchase orders do
not have to be printed.
Purchase orders can be printed on plain paper or on the standard purchase order
form. The form has a tear off section on the right hand side that allows internal
notes and warehouse notes to be printed for internal use but remain unseen by
your vendor. If printed on plain paper, purchase orders print on your Other
Printer. If printed on the standard form, they print on your Purchase Order Forms
Printer.
If your system includes the Fax Modem module, purchase orders can be faxed
directly to your vendors in addition to or instead of printing them on paper or
forms.
Purchase orders can be printed with either your company address, the appropriate
warehouse address, or without your company or warehouse address. Also,
depending on the entry in SYS/POS, either the FASPAC item number or item
shortname will print. See the System Maintenance Reference Manual in Volume
5 for detailed information.
All eligible or a range of purchase orders can be printed. An eligible purchase
order is a purchase order that has never been printed or has been changed in the
Purchase Order Maintenance (PO/PM) or Purchase Order Line Maintenance
(PO/PL) programs since it was last printed.
If purchase orders are faxed, internal and warehouse notes are automatically
excluded. However, when printing all eligible or a range of purchase orders, you
are given the choice to print or exclude internal notes.
When printing to plain paper, internal notes print in the body of the purchase
order, underneath the item. Warehouse notes are considered internal and do not
print if the option to exclude internal notes is selected.
When printing on a standard purchase order form, internal and warehouse notes
print in the tear-off section, to prevent them from being seen by your vendor.
External notes print in the body of the purchase order, beneath the item.
Note: External notes include the cross-reference information if an item was
entered using a Cross-reference number that has a Y in the NOTE field in the
Cross-Reference record.
FPD/203 PO - 99
PRINT (PO/PP)
![Page 100: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
If a header comment is entered, it prints beneath the vendor in the header section
of the purchase order. If an item comment is entered, it prints on the right hand
side of the purchase order, under the extended cost.
If the purchase order header contains a Currency Code, the purchase order prints
in foreign currency. If the cost is entered in foreign currency and the “Enter
Using” field of SYCD/CU is flagged with an F, the Currency Code description
also prints. This occurs whether the purchase order is printed on plain paper,
purchase order forms, or faxed directly to your vendors.
If the vendor has a valid Vendor Code in the Vendor Record, any messages with
a Note Type of PO are included on the purchase order whether it is printed on
plain paper, purchase order forms, or faxed to the vendor.
The Tag Number assigned to each line item prints if System Maintenance
(SYS/IMS) is flagged to use the Tag System.
If an item has the cubic volume per unit of measure defined in the Inventory file,
it prints as a note line. If items have unit volume and/or weight per unit of
measure defined in the Inventory file, the total weight prints at the end of the
purchase order.
The word DUPLICATE prints on a purchase order that has been previously
printed, HEADING CHANGE prints on a purchase order changed in Purchase
Order Maintenance (PO/PM), and LINE CHANGE prints on a purchase order
changed in Purchase Order Line Maintenance (PO/PL). If a purchase order is
changed in both maintenance programs, only LINE CHANGE prints.
The program uses the City, County, and State codes specified in Warehouse
Address Maintenance (PO/POM/WAM) to calculate taxes. If one or more codes
were not specified in WAM, the program uses the codes specified in Company
Information (SYS/CIS).
PO - 100 FPD/203
PRINT (PO/PP)
![Page 101: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number from which to print purchase orders.
To print purchase orders from all warehouses, leave this field blank and
press SKIP.
To exit the program, press CMD-Q.
Print All Eligible Orders? (Y/N)
Y = Print all eligible purchase orders.
N = Specify a range of purchase orders to print.
Note: An eligible order is an order that has not been printed previously
or has been changed since it was last printed.
The following two fields are available only if you entered Y in the
Print All Eligible Orders field.
Entered By initials (SKIP for ALL)
Enter initials assigned to a specific FASPAC password. Only purchase
orders entered by or changed by the person assigned to that password are
printed.
To print all purchase orders, regardless of the operator initials, leave this
field blank and press SKIP.
FPD/203 PO - 101
PRINT (PO/PP)
![Page 102: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
Include Backorders (Y/N)?
Y = Print eligible original and backordered purchase orders.
N = Print only eligible original purchase orders for which no receiving
has been done.
The following two fields are available only if you entered N in the
Print All Eligible Orders field.
Print From P. O. No.
Enter the first purchase order number in the range to print.
Print Thru P. O. No
The entry in the From field is displayed.
Press RETURN to print this purchase order only or enter the last
purchase order number in the range to print.
The following fields apply to all options selected.
Print Zero Balance Lines? (Y/N)
Y = Print all lines on each purchase order.
N = Print only lines that have a quantity on order that is not equal to
zero.
Print Internal Notes (Y/N)
Y = Print internal note lines on the purchase order.
N = Do not print internal note lines on the purchase order.
Note: If printing on the standard purchase order form, internal notes print
in the tear off section to prevent them from being seen by your vendor. If
printing on plain paper, internal notes print in the body of the purchase
order, underneath the item.
Print to (P/F/X/E/D)
P = Print the purchase order on plain paper.
F = Print the purchase order on a PO form.
X = Fax the purchase order directly to your vendor.
Note: The fax option is available only if you have the optional Fax
Modem module.
E = Send the purchase order to the vendor’s e-mail address specified in
POM/SFM or AP/MAR/VM. If an e-mail address cannot be found, you
are prompted to enter one.
PO - 102 FPD/203
PRINT (PO/PP)
![Page 103: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
D = Send the purchase order to the Default output devices specified in
POM/SFM or AP/MAR/VM. If output devices have not been specified,
you are prompted to enter one or more.
Note: You can specify more than one Default device, such as Form and
E-mail. However, you cannot specify more than one printer device (such
as Plain paper and Form) at the same time.
Continue?
Y = Print/fax the purchase orders as specified.
N = Exit the program without printing/faxing the purchase orders.
Test Pattern? (Y/N)
Y = Print a test pattern before printing the purchase orders.
N = Print the purchase orders immediately, without printing a test
pattern.
Include PO Commitments? (Y/N)
This option is available only if printing on plain paper. This field refers
to the information entered in the Order and Line fields when the purchase
order was entered.
Y = The customer, sales order, and line number to which each line item
is committed (if applicable) prints immediately beneath each item.
N = Do not print customer order commitment information.
The following fields are displayed only if you entered X in the Print to
(P/F/X/E/D) field.
Fax to (Person)
The contact name in the Vendor Record (AP/MAR/VM, PO/VM) is
displayed.
Press RETURN to accept this name or enter a new name.
Fax to (Number)
The fax number in the Vendor Record (AP/MAR/ VM, PO/VM) is
displayed.
Press RETURN to accept this number or enter a new number.
From (Person)
Enter the name of the person sending the fax.
FPD/203 PO - 103
PRINT (PO/PP)
![Page 104: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
Listing (PO/LIS)
The Purchase Order Listing program prints a listing of open purchase orders that
were created through the Purchase Order Entry program (PO/PE) or through the
Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP). By selecting the
appropriate parameters, the Purchase Order Listing can be an effective tool when
expediting your open purchase orders.
The Purchase Order Listing is printed for one or all warehouses, for purchase
orders past due as of a specific date, and for purchase orders placed within a
specific range of dates.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number from which to print the list of open
purchase orders.
To include open purchase orders from all warehouses, leave this field
blank and press SKIP.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press CMD.
PO - 104 FPD/203
LISTING (PO/LIS)
![Page 105: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
Print Only PO’s Past Due As Of
The sign on date is displayed. Press RETURN to accept this date or
enter another date using the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format. Only
purchase orders with due dates prior to this date will be considered.
To include all open purchase orders regardless of the PO’s past due date,
press SKIP while the cursor is on the first character in the field.
Print From Order Date
Thru Order Date
Enter the range of order dates to include on the listing. The dates must be
entered using the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format. Only purchase
orders with an order date that falls within the specified range will be
considered.
To begin with the earliest date found and end with the latest order date,
leave both fields blank and press SKIP.
Print Whole File? (Y/N)
Y = Print all purchase orders that meet the specified parameters.
N = Print only those purchase orders that meet the specified parameters
and fall within the range to be identified.
Select Print Sequence
1 = PO/Line: purchase orders print in numeric sequence; all detail lines
print in line number sequence within each purchase order.
2 = PO/Item: purchase orders print in numeric sequence; all detail lines
print in item number sequence within each purchase order.
3 = Vendor/PO/Line: vendors are printed in numeric sequence; purchase
orders print in numeric sequence for each vendor; all detail lines print in
line number sequence within each purchase order.
4 = Vendor/PO/Item: vendors are printed in numeric sequence; purchase
orders print in numeric sequence for each vendor; all detail lines print in
item number sequence within each purchase order.
5 = Vendor/Item/PO: vendors are printed in numeric sequence; purchase
order information is printed for each vendor in item number sequence
and in purchase order number sequence within each item number.
6 = Item/PO: Item numbers print in numeric sequence; purchase order
information prints in numeric sequence within each item number.
7 = Item/Vendor: Item numbers print in numeric sequence; purchase
orders are listed for each item in vendor sequence.
Note: If option 1, 2, 3 or 4 is selected, the purchase order header due date
is used to determine whether or not to include the purchase order. If
option 5, 6 or 7 is selected, the item due date is used.
FPD/203 PO - 105
LISTING (PO/LIS)
![Page 106: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
From PO Number/ Vendor/Item
Thru PO Number/ Vendor/Item
These fields are displayed only if you entered N in the Print Whole File
field. They display according to the print option selected.
Enter the range of purchase order numbers, vendor numbers, or item
numbers (depending on the print option selected) to include on the
Purchase Order Listing.
Print for a Range of Expedite Dates? (Y/N)
Y = Include only those purchase orders that have an expedite date in the
Header that falls into the range to be identified.
N = Include all specified purchase orders, regardless of the expedite date
in the PO Header.
From
Thru
These fields are displayed only if you entered Y in the Print for a Range
of Expedite Dates field.
Enter the range of expedite dates for which to print. Only those purchase
orders that have an expedite date that falls into the specified range are
included on the listing.
Note: This program references the expedite date specified in the
purchase order header when determining which purchase orders to
include.
Any Changes?
Y = Change one or all of the displayed entries.
N = Accept the displayed entries.
Note: If Y is entered in this field, the cursor moves to the Whse field.
Continue?
Y = Print the Purchase Order Listing as specified.
N = Exit the program without printing the Purchase Order Listing.
PO - 106 FPD/203
LISTING (PO/LIS)
![Page 107: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
Error Messages
The following error messages may be printed on the listing.
PO Header Not On File
The Header Record for this purchase order was deleted. Call the
FASPAC Service Center for assistance.
Vendor Not On File
The vendor assigned to this purchase order was deleted. Recreate the
Vendor Record (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM).
Sample Listing
FPD/203 PO - 107
LISTING (PO/LIS)
COMPANY: 10 BEST FASTENERS, INC. PAGE 1
RUN ID: LIS PURCHASE ORDER LISTING 07/25/96
RUN BY: WPD PAST DUE AS OF: 07/25/96 15:40:29 03/25/97
BY PO/ITEM
DATE DATE
ORDERED DUE WH LINE QTY ORD RECEIVED BALANCE COST UM RWK EXT COST SHIP VIA SHIP TO
================================================================================================================================
004343 SERV SERVICE SUPPLY 800-428-4686 317-638-2411
/I3 BEST FASTENERS INSPECTION LEVEL 3 (COMMERCIAL) EA
11/27/95 07/12/96 01 001 1 0 1 0.00 EA 0.00 UPS PER SCHEDU BEST FASTENERS, INC.
UPS ASAP PER RELEASE SCHE
10F25MWF0Z 10-32 X 1/4 WHIZ FLANGE SCREW ZINC C
11/27/95 07/12/96 01 009 13000 2500 10500 1.72 C 180.81 UPS PER SCHEDU BEST FASTENERS, INC.
DELTEC STOCK
ESHIP APR 27 PLEASE
******TOTAL LISTED FOR P.O. 004343 COST = 180.81
004427 BOSSA BOSSARD INTERNATIONAL, IN 800-762-3225
.3NLOC0Z M3 SPLIT LOCKWASHER ZINC C
12/01/95 07/10/96 01 030 34000 0 34000 0.10 C 34.00 WILL CALL BEST FASTENERS, INC.
DELTEC
.3C10MPP0Z M3-.5 X 10 PHIL PAN M/S ZINC C
12/01/95 07/10/96 01 028 30000 0 30000 0.47 C 141.00 WILL CALL BEST FASTENERS, INC.
DELTEC
.3C12MPP0Z M3-.5 X 12 PHIL PAN M/S ZINC C
12/01/95 07/10/96 01 029 13000 0 13000 0.50 C 65.00 WILL CALL BEST FASTENERS , INC.
DELTEC
12/01/95 07/14/96 01 033 13000 0 13000 0.50 C 65.00 WILL CALL BEST FASTENERS, INC.
DELTEC
.3NWSF0Z M3 FLAT WASHER ZINC C
12/01/95 07/10/96 01 031 34000 0 34000 0.10 C 34.00 WILL CALL BEST FASTENERS, INC.
DELTEC
******TOTAL LISTED FOR P.O. 004427 COST = 339.00
004612 GRAIN GRAINGER MANUFACTURING, I 508-520-4005
4C50ZJS0Y 4-40 X 1/2 JACK SCREW (3/16 AF) ZINC II C
12/21/95 07/20/96 01 004 10000 0 10000 6.40 C 640.00 UPS BEST FASTENERS, INC.
IMED 8/07 & 9/11
******TOTAL LISTED FOR P.O. 004612 COST = 640.00
![Page 108: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
Inquiry (PO/INQ)
The Purchase Order Inquiry program is used to display purchase orders from the
Purchase Order file (purchase orders that have not been deleted or canceled).
You can display the detail of a specific purchase order directly or you can display
the list of purchase orders for a specific vendor, select a specific purchase order
from the displayed list, and then display the detail.
If you request a specific purchase order, one or all warehouses can be included in
the search. Once the specified purchase order is found, it is displayed in the
Detail Entry/Inquiry Screen. The information displayed for each line item in the
Detail Entry/Inquiry Screen includes the item number and description, the
quantities ordered, received and back ordered, the extended cost and the unit of
measure. All note lines for each item also display. You can access the Purchase
Order Maintenance Screen by pressing F5 while the cursor is in the SELECT
field. Refer to the Header Maintenance (PO/PM) section of the manual for
information regarding changes to the purchase order header.
If you display purchase orders for a specific vendor, you must specify a ship-to
address. Only the purchase orders that meet the specified parameters are
displayed. The information for each purchase order listed includes: the Ship
From Code, the warehouse number, and the due date entered in the header
section of the purchase order. You can display the detail of one of the listed
purchase orders by entering the field number in the SELECT field.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
PO - 108 FPD/203
INQUIRY (PO/INQ)
![Page 109: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number from which to display the purchase orders.
To include purchase orders from all warehouses, leave this field blank
and press SKIP.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press CMD.
P.O.
Enter the purchase order number you want to display.
To display the list of purchase orders for a specific vendor, leave this
field blank and press SKIP.
If a purchase order number is entered in this field, the Detail screen
displays with information on the specified purchase order. See page 111.
Error Messages:
End of File
All purchase orders that meet the specified parameters have been
listed/displayed.
P.O. Not on File - SKIP
The purchase order number entered is not on file.
Either an incorrect purchase order number was entered, or the
purchase order number entered has been deleted or cancelled.
Press SKIP and begin again.
The following three fields are displayed only if you entered the vendor
rather than the PO number.
Vend
Enter the vendor name or number from whom you are purchasing the
items. The vendor must be defined in the Vendor file as a PO Vendor.
You can access the Vendor file by entering the first character of the
vendor name or number, and pressing the appropriate function key (F1 to
access the list based on the vendor number, F2 to access the list based on
the vendor name). Once a vendor is displayed, use F3 to scroll forward
through the list and F4 to scroll back through the list. To accept the
displayed vendor, press RETURN.
FPD/203 PO - 109
INQUIRY (PO/INQ)
![Page 110: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
Error Message:
Invalid Entry, Function, or End of File...SKIP
Either an invalid vendor was entered, the wrong function key was
pressed, or the end of file was reached while scrolling through the
Vendor file.
Press SKIP and either begin again or exit this program.
From
Enter the Ship From Code (defined in the Vendor file) of the purchase
orders to display for this vendor.
To use the Ship From Code of SAME, leave this field blank and press
SKIP.
To access the list of Ship From Codes for this vendor, enter the first
character of one of the Ship From Codes and press F1. Once a Ship From
Code is displayed, use the F3 and F4 function keys to scroll forward and
back through the list. Press RETURN to accept the displayed Ship From
address.
SELECT
F1 = Redisplaythe purchase orders from the top of the list. “End of File”
is displayed on the bottom of the screen once you have reached the last
P.O. on the list.
F3 = View more purchase orders for this vendor.
F6 = Enter the line number of the purchase order for which to display the
detail.
To exit, leave this field blank and press SKIP or CMD.
Note: Once a line number is entered in this field, the Detail screen
displays with information on the specified purchase order.
PO - 110 FPD/203
INQUIRY (PO/INQ)
![Page 111: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
Detail Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
SELECT
Use the function keys as described below to locate specific items on the
displayed purchase order.
F1 = Redisplays the items beginning with the first line number on the
purchase order. This function should only be used if you have previously
scrolled through the list of items or displayed the list beginning with a
specific line number.
F3 = Scrolls through the line items on the displayed purchase order one
screen at a time.
F5 = Allows you to view the purchase order header . See the Header
Maintenance section (PO/PM) for detailed field explanations.
F6 = Displays the purchase order beginning with a specific line number.
Once this key is pressed, you must specify the line number with which to
begin displaying the purchase order.
Error Message:
End Of File
All lines on the purchase order have been displayed. You cannot
scroll any further.
FPD/203 PO - 111
INQUIRY (PO/INQ)
![Page 112: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
History Maintenance (PO/HM)
The Purchase Order History Maintenance program is used to display, add, or
change the existing purchase order history information for a specific vendor.
Purchase order history information can also be added for a vendor WITHOUT
existing purchase order history information.
Purchase order history information consists of the total value of purchase orders
created through the Purchase Order Entry (PO/PE) and Create Preliminary
Purchase Orders (PO/CPP) programs for the past twelve months, the current
month, the current year to date, and last year to date.
When the figures for one or more of the displayed months are manually changed,
the figures for the current month, the current year to date, and/or last year to date
are not recalculated. You must change the amount in the appropriate field (this
month, this year, last year) if you change the figures for one of the displayed
months. When the Inventory Monthly Update program (MU) is run, it simply
rolls back the values for the past twelve months, it does not do any calculating.
If a purchase order is cancelled through the Purchase Order Cancel program
(PO/CAN), the amount of the purchase order is not automatically deducted from
the values in Purchase Order History Maintenance (PO/HM) to reflect a
cancelled purchase order.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
PO - 112 FPD/203
HISTORY MAINTENANCE (PO/HM)
![Page 113: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number from which to display the purchase order
history information.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP or CMD.
Vend
Enter the vendor number for which to display, add, or change the
purchase order history information. You can access the Vendor file by
entering the first character of the vendor name or number, and pressing
the appropriate function key (F1 to access the list based on the vendor
number, F2 to access the list based on the vendor name). Once a vendor
is displayed, use F3 to scroll forward through the list and F4 to scroll
back through the list.
To accept the displayed vendor, press RETURN. Once a valid vendor is
accepted, the history information is displayed and the cursor moves to
the SELECT field (if history exists).
Error Message:
Invalid Entry, Function or End of File. . .SKIP
Either an invalid vendor was entered, the wrong function key was
pressed, or the end of the file was reached while scrolling through
the Vendor file.
Press SKIP and either begin again or exit the program.
No History For This Vendor, Do You Want to Add? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if no purchase order history exists for the
specified vendor.
Y = Create history for this vendor.
N = Return the cursor to the Vend field. Y = the cursor moves through
each of the Value fields. You can enter an amount from .01 to
999999999.99.
To enter a zero amount, leave the field blank and press SKIP.
Note: You can have entered a vendor that is not a purchase order vendor.
Make certain you want to add purchase order history information before
entering Y.
FPD/203 PO - 113
HISTORY MAINTENANCE (PO/HM)
![Page 114: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field entry you want to change.
To delete the entire Purchase Order History Record, enter DE.
Note: When the figures for one or more of the displayed months are
manually changed, the figures for the current month, the current year to
date, and/or the last year to date are not recalculated. You must change
the amount in the appropriate field (this month, this year, last year) if you
change the figures for one of the displayed months. When the Inventory
Monthly Update program (MU) is run, it rolls back the values for the
past twelve months; it does not do any calculating.
The following fields are updated by the system and cannot be
changed.
Month
Year
The current inventory month and year.
Name
Addr
City State
Zip Country
Phone 1
Phone 2
Contact
Fax
The information defined in the Vendor file (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM) for
the specified vendor.
PO - 114 FPD/203
HISTORY MAINTENANCE (PO/HM)
![Page 115: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
History Report (PO/HR)
The Purchase Order History Report program prints the purchase order history
information stored in the Purchase Order History file (PO/HM).
The report can be printed for one or all warehouses and for one or a range of
vendors.
Note: This program can be used in an automated schedule.
Modes of Operation
There are two modes of operation when you answer questions for this program:
Create and Modify. Create mode is the first time you run the program and answer
questions. Modify mode is when you rerun the program and change existing
answers. The questions on the screen and your answers are stored in an Answer
file.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
FPD/203 PO - 115
MODES OF OPERATION
![Page 116: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
Field Explanation
01) Warehouse
Enter the number of the warehouse from which to print the purchase
order history information.
For all warehouses, press SKIP.
To exit the program, press CMD.
02) Vendor/Shortname Sequence?
N = Print the report by vendor number.
S = Print the report by vendor shortname in alphabetical order.
Fields 03 and 04 reflect the selected sequence.
03) Include From
04) Include Thru
Enter the range of vendor number or shortnames to include.
For all vendor number or shortnames, press F7.
For one vendor number or shortname, enter it in both fields.
Action Line
F1 = Accept your answers.
F9 = Cancel and start over with your original answers in Modify mode.
F12 = Delete all questions and answers from the Answer file and start
over in Create mode.
CMD = Exit the program without running it.
PO - 116 FPD/203
HISTORY REPORT (PO/HR)
![Page 117: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
Sample Report
The total value of purchase orders is listed on the report for the current month,
current year to date, past twelve months, last year, and last year to date. This
information is listed for each specified vendor and warehouse.
A grand total prints at the end of the report.
FPD/203 PO - 117
MODES OF OPERATION
COMPANY: 10 BEST FASTENERS, INC. PAGE 1
RUN ID: HR PURCHASE ORDER HISTORY REPORT 07/25/96
RUN BY: WPD WHSE ALL CURRENT MONTH JUL 15:47:24 03/25/97
WH VENDOR NAME CURR M-T-D < - - - - - - - - - - - - M O N T H L Y A C T I V I T Y - - - - - - - - - - - >
---------------------------------------------- * JUN 96 * MAY 96 * APR 96 * MAR 96 * FEB 96 * JAN 96 *
LAST YEAR LAST Y-T-D CURR Y-T-D * DEC 95 * NOV 95 * OCT 95 * SEP 95 * AUG 95 * JUL 95 *
================================================================================================================================
01 SP SIERRA PACIFIC SUPPLY CO. 202.10 88.28 277.98 332.44 101.85 46.72 174.12
2189.79 .00 202.10 370.34 286.27 101.48 113.20 177.25 119.86
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 ALL ALL ELECTRONICS HARDWARE, I .00 .00 .00 .00 332.60 2645.85 974.95
8304.36 .00 .00 1461.08 .00 166.00 327.34 .00 2396.54
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 B&B B & B SPECIALTIES, INC .00 85.00 60.00 30.00 .00 71.25 826.00
1943.15 .00 .00 .00 80.00 .00 80.60 89.70 620.60
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 B&G B & G MANUFACTURING COMPANY 45.54 494.50 197.80 92.50 50.05 .00 268.10
1671.08 .00 45.54 58.00 .00 272.10 .00 238.03 .00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 BEK LEVEL 1 FASTENERS .00 5896.20 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
5896.20 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 DIX DIX INDUSTRIES, INC. 255.00 1072.00 .00 .00 .00 114.20 168.00
1705.80 .00 255.00 .00 117.50 220.00 14.10 .00 .00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 EKF E K FASTENERS, INC. 1426.04 494.42 1732.42 1732.38 539.55 956.39 316.55
14946.61 .00 1426.04 3829.18 1573.22 1577.55 969.60 541.35 684.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 JAY JAY FASTENER INC. 3177.65 284.97 327.51 335.07 61.55 545.93 418.24
3032.41 .00 3177.65 61.58 21.81 319.37 .00 337.51 318.87
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 JET JET FITTINGS & SUPPLY CORP. 3500.00 47.00- 1440.00 1920.00 4972.60 17804.00 8446.60
90424.70 .00 3500.00 440.00 25791.00 11005.00 9852.00 8288.00 512.50
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MFC METRIC FASTENERS CORPORATIO .00 .00 27.36 .00 .00 .00 .00
200.63 .00 .00 35.45 .00 .00 30.00 84.43 23.39
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 NDI N D INDUSTRIES .00 430.02 125.04 125.00 62.76 62.52 77.16
882.50 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 PFC PORTEOUS FASTENER COMPANY 2013.91 1570.31 2930.46 3852.31 1947.04 4306.95 1747.27
35527.42 .00 2013.91 2237.60 8640.52 1955.29 1721.44 1526.41 3091.82
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 PRE PRECISION SCALE .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
2901.50 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 2901.50 .00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 PWS PACIFIC WHSE SALES 15.00 .00 267.50 136.25 266.98 926.40 458.98
3675.26 .00 15.00 504.46 156.90 237.60 20.00 614.54 85.65
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 RAF RAF ELECTRONIC HARDWARE, IN 2580.32 652.99 1377.36 1226.21 1538.91 2321.75 2618.16
![Page 118: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM)
Use the Vendor Maintenance program to create, modify, and delete vendor
records in the Vendor file. A vendor must be in the Vendor file in order to be
used in the Accounts Payable and Purchasing programs. All vendors in the
Vendor file are available for use in the Accounts Payable programs, however, a
vendor must be flagged as a purchase order vendor in order to be used in the
Purchasing programs.
Each Vendor record consists of four screens.
• The first screen contains vendor information. A unique vendor number
must be entered for each Vendor record. The Vend, Name, Shortname, P.
O. Vendor, and Taxable fields are required fields. The remit-to address
should be entered in the Addr, City, State, and Zip fields so that checks
will print correctly. All other fields are either optional or updated by the
system.
• The second screen contains the purchase order information for the vendor.
Display it by pressing F1.
• The third screen contains information for printing, faxing, or emailing
purchase orders, blanket purchase orders, and vendor requisitions. Display
it by pressing F5. For more information about faxing, see Faxing
Documents below.
• The fourth screen is where you can enter notes for the vendor.
Remember that the information entered in the optional fields is displayed or used
in other programs such as Invoice Entry (AP/IE) and Purchase Order Entry
(PO/PE). The more information you enter in Vendor Maintenance, the more time
you will save when working in other programs.
This program allows you to flag a vendor as using foreign currency. A code must
first be defined in the System Code Master File (SYCD), defining the currency
used. This code can then be entered in the Vendor Code field for each vendor
who uses this type of currency.
An existing vendor record can be modified at any time as long as it is not being
used by another program (for example, you can not modify a vendor record if
someone else is entering invoices for the vendor through Invoice Entry). Those
fields updated by the system should be changed only to correct an error situation.
An existing vendor record can be deleted if it is not being used by another
program, and if it has no open Accounts Payable transactions and no open
purchase orders. An error message is displayed if you try to delete a vendor
record that does have open AP transactions or open purchase orders.
PO - 118 FPD/203
VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/VM)
![Page 119: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
Note: The Vendor Maintenance program (AP/MAR/VM) is also located in the
Accounts Payable module.
Consolidation Companies
The Vendor Maintenance program is available when you are signed on to a
consolidation company. If a vendor record is added while you are signed on to a
consolidation company and the vendor is not already on file for the companies
assigned to the consolidation company, the vendor record is added for the
consolidation company and all companies assigned to it. If the vendor is already
on file for any of the companies assigned to the consolidation company, the
vendor record is created only in the consolidation company’s Vendor file and a
message is displayed indicating that this situation occurred.
If you make changes to the first two Address, City, State, and Zip fields in an
existing record in the Vendor file while you are signed on to the consolidation
company, they are also made in the Vendor file of each company assigned to the
consolidation company. Changes to the other fields must be made while you are
signed on to the consolidation company and each company assigned to the
consolidation company. Deleting a vendor record while you are signed on to a
consolidation company deletes the record from the consolidation company’s
Vendor file only.
Default Fax or Email Information
When you fax or email a purchase order or blanket purchase order, the system
checks for default fax information in the following order:
• Vendor Ship From Maintenance (PO/POM/SFM) screen two is checked
first.
• If nothing is found in screen two, it checks PO/POM/SFM screen one.
• If nothing is found in PO/POM/SFM, it then checks Vendor Maintenance
(AP/MAR/VM) screen three.
• If nothing is found in AP/MAR/VM screen three, it checks the purchase
order or blanket purchase order for the contact.
• If nothing is found in the purchase order, it checks AP/MAR/VM screen
one.
• If no entries are found in AP/MAR/VM screen one, you are prompted for
the required information when you fax the document.
FPD/203 PO - 119
DEFAULT FAX OR EMAIL INFORMATION
![Page 120: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
When you fax or email a vendor requisition, the system checks for default fax
information in the following order:
• Vendor Maintenance (AP/MAR/VM) screen three is checked first.
• If nothing is found in AP/MAR/VM screen three, it checks AP/MAR/VM
screen one.
• If nothing is found in AP/MAR/VM screen one, it looks for the
requisition’s default salutation.
• If the requisition’s default is not found, you are prompted for the required
information when you fax the document.
Entry/Inquiry Screen One
Field Explanation
Note: When creating a new vendor record, all of the following fields
(except Vend, Name, and Tax) can be left blank by pressing SKIP.
Vend
Enter the name or number on the vendor record you want to display/edit.
If you are unsure of the complete vendor name or number you can access
the list of vendor records by using the function keys or the Look-Up
function.
PO - 120 FPD/203
VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/VM)
![Page 121: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
To access the list of vendors using the function keys, enter the first few
characters of the vendor name or number and press the appropriate
function key (F1 to access the list based on the vendor number, F2 to
access the list based on the vendor name). Once a valid vendor is
displayed, use F3 to scroll forward and F4 to scroll back through the
Vendor file.
To accept the displayed vendor, press RETURN.
Press CMD-L to select from the list of vendors.
To create a new vendor record, type NEW. The field is cleared and the
message “Enter Vendor Account No.” is displayed at the bottom of the
screen. You must enter a unique vendor number.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP.
Error Messages:
Invalid Entry, Function, or End of file...SKIP
An invalid vendor code was entered, the wrong function key was
pressed, or the end of the Vendor file was reached while scrolling.
Press SKIP and begin again or exit.
Vendor Already On File
The number you have entered for this vendor is already on file for
another vendor. Each vendor must be assigned a unique number.
02 Name
Enter the name of the vendor.
03 Addr
through
06 Addr
Enter the remit-to address of the vendor.
Only the information in the first two fields will print on forms and
reports. The information in the last two fields is for internal reference
only.
07 City
Enter the name of the city.
State
Enter a valid State Code, defined in the System Code Master File
(SYCD) - Record Type ST.
To leave the field blank, press SKIP.
FPD/203 PO - 121
DEFAULT FAX OR EMAIL INFORMATION
![Page 122: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
Error Message:
Invalid Code
The code entered is not on file in the System Code Master File
(SYCD). This entry must be a valid State Code that has been defined
in System Code Maintenance (SYCD).
08 Zip
Enter the zip code. Do not enter a dash between the 5th and 6th digits—it
is automatically inserted when checks are printed.
Country
Enter a valid Country Code, defined in the System Code Master File
(SYCD) - Record Type CT.
To leave this field blank, press SKIP.
Error Message:
Invalid Code
The code entered is not on file in the System Code Master File
(SYCD). This entry must be a valid Country Code that has been
defined in System Code Maintenance (SYCD).
09 Phone1
Enter the primary phone number, including the dashes (619-555-1212).
10 Phone2
Enter the alternate phone number, including the dashes (619-555-1212).
11 Contact
Enter the name of your contact.
12 Fax
Enter the fax number, including the dashes (619-444-1212).
13 Id No
The vendor’s Federal ID number for use when issuing 1099 tax forms.
14 Id Flag
This entry is used when printing 1099 forms (AP/MAR/IRS). It
determines whether or not a vendor should receive a 1099 form and
where on the form the total dollar amount is to print.
1 = Rents
2 = Royalties
3 = Other income
5 = Fishing boat
PO - 122 FPD/203
VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/VM)
![Page 123: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
6 = Insurance payment
7 = Payments
15 Terms
Enter a valid Terms Code, defined in System Code Maintenance (SYCD)
- Record Type VT.
To leave the field blank, press SKIP.
Error Message:
Invalid Code
The code entered is not on file in the System Code Master File
(SYCD). This entry must be a valid Terms Code that has been
defined in System Code Maintenance (SYCD).
16 Disc %
Enter the discount percentage you receive from this vendor.
Enter the amount in decimals (for example, 10.00 = 10%). This
percentage is used in the Invoice Entry program (AP/IE) in conjunction
with the invoice amount to calculate the discount amount.
Note: Do not enter a minus sign when entering the discount. If a minus
sign is entered in this field, the price will be increased by the specified
percent.
17 Disc Days
Enter the number of days you have to pay and still receive the discount.
This number is used in the Invoice Entry program (AP/IE) in conjunction
with the invoice date entered to determine the discount date.
18 Due Days
Enter the number of days you have to pay a vendor’s invoice. The default
is 30.
This number is used in the Invoice Entry program (AP/IE) in conjunction
with the invoice date to determine the due date.
19 Shortname
The first five characters of the entry in the Name field are displayed.
Press RETURN to accept this entry or enter a new shortname.
The shortname (also referred to as the alpha name) is used for
alphabetical sequencing of reports, so it should be a good representation
of the vendor name.
FPD/203 PO - 123
DEFAULT FAX OR EMAIL INFORMATION
![Page 124: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
20 Remarks
Enter any comments/remarks you want to record regarding this vendor.
The remarks are automatically displayed in the Purchase Order Entry
program (PO/PE), and you can include them in the purchase order
header.
22 Pay Priority
Enter the priority of this vendor to receive payment: 1 = High priority
through 9 = Low priority.
The Aged Trial Balance (AP/ATB) can be printed in Pay Priority order,
and Payment Selection (AP/CHK/PS) can be done by Pay Priority.
23 GL Acct 1
Enter the account number to which a majority of the transactions
involving this vendor will be assigned.
This general ledger number is displayed for use in the Invoice Entry
program (AP/IE).
% to Acct 1
When in the Invoice Entry program (AP/IE), the entry in this field is
used to automatically distribute a percentage of the total invoice amount
to the account number entered in the previous GL Acct 1 field.
Enter the percentage in decimal format (for example, 80.00 = 80%). If
you do not want a specific percentage of the total invoice amount
distributed to this account number, leave this field blank and press SKIP.
24 GL Acct 2
Enter the alternate account number for this vendor.
The general ledger number entered here is displayed for use in the
Invoice Entry program (AP/IE).
25 P.O. Vendor
Y = This vendor will be used in the Purchasing programs.
N = This vendor is not to be used in the Purchasing programs.
Error Message:
Vendor on File For Company ________ Vendor Added to Consolidate
Company Only
You are adding a vendor record while signed onto a consolidation
company and the vendor is already on file for one of the companies
assigned to the consolidation company.
Press RETURN to acknowledge the message. The vendor record
was added only to the consolidation company’s Vendor file. You
must add it to the other companies individually.
PO - 124 FPD/203
VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/VM)
![Page 125: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
The following fields are updated by the system and should be
modified only to correct an error.
26 Last Payment
The date of the last check that was paid to this vendor.
27 Last Pmt Amt
The last amount paid to this vendor.
28 A/P Balance
The total amount of all open transactions (invoices, credit memos, fixed
expense records) for this vendor.
29 YTD Disc
The total dollar amount of discounts received this year to date from this
vendor.
30 Vendor Code
The Vendor Code (Record Type - VP) has three different functions:
Define vendor price tables
Flag a vendor as using foreign currency and identify the type of currency
used
Create vendor group messages.
Check to see how the Vendor Codes have been defined in SYCD before
entering a code.
Note: If this vendor is flagged as a PO vendor, the PO Extension screen
displays after a valid entry is made. If this vendor is not flagged as a PO
vendor, the cursor moves to the SELECT field. See the following pages
for detailed field explanations on the PO Extension screen.
Error Messages:
30 Vendor Code
Changing Currency; Currency Have Foreign Totals, Correct For New
Currency
You are trying to replace the existing vendor code that contains one
currency code, with a vendor code that contains another currency
code.
Correct the amounts in the26 Last Pmt Amt and 28 YTD Disc fields
to reflect the new currency code.
FPD/203 PO - 125
DEFAULT FAX OR EMAIL INFORMATION
![Page 126: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
Have Open Foreign A/P Balance, Can Not Change Currency. . .SKIP
You are trying to replace the existing vendor code which contains
one currency code with another vendor code that uses a different
currency code, and the A/P foreign balance is not zero. This change
cannot be made until the A/P foreign balance is zero.
Have Open Foreign A/P Balance, Can Not Change to Domestic
Currency. . .SKIP
You are trying to replace the existing vendor code which indicates
foreign currency used with a vendor code that indicates domestic
currency used, and the A/P foreign balance is not zero. This change
cannot be made until the A/P foreign balance is zero.
Have Open Domestic A/P Balance, Can Not Change To Foreign
Currency. . . SKIP
You are trying to replace the existing vendor code that indicates
domestic currency used with a vendor code that indicates foreign
currency used, and the A/P balance is not zero. This change cannot
be made until the A/P balance amount is zero.
26 Last Pmt Amt
27 A/P Balance
28 YTD Disc
If field 30 is used to flag vendors who use foreign currency, these three
fields will display the foreign currency amount.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field entry you want to change.
Press F6 to access the Message/Notes Maintenance screen for this
vendor
Type DE and press RETURN to delete this vendor from the Vendor
Master file.
Note: A vendor record can be deleted only if it has no open AP
transactions and no open POs (A/P Balance and On Order fields will be
zero).
Press F1 to toggle back and forth between this screen and the PO
Extension screen (the second screen).
Press CMD-U to exit the program and update the new or modified
information to the Vendor Master file.
Press CMD-Q to quit the program without updating the information.
PO - 126 FPD/203
VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/VM)
![Page 127: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
Error Message:
Vendor Has Open Balance - Cannot Delete - SKIP
You are trying to delete a vendor that has open AP transactions or
open POs.
Press SKIP and enter a different vendor or exit this program.
Delete this Vendor. . . Are You Sure?
This field is displayed only if you entered DE in the SELECT field.
Y = Delete the displayed Vendor record from the Vendor Master file.
N = Move the cursor back to the SELECT field, without deleting the
displayed Vendor record.
FPD/203 PO - 127
DEFAULT FAX OR EMAIL INFORMATION
![Page 128: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen Two
Field Explanation
01 Last Purch
If you are creating a new vendor, the sign on date displays as the last
purchase date. This field is updated by the system and should be
modified only to correct an error.
02 Taxable
The default is N.
N = The vendor does not charge tax.
Y = This vendor does charge tax.
If Y is entered, tax will automatically be calculated when a purchase
order is created through the Purchase Order Entry (PO/PE) or Create
Preliminary Purchase Orders (PO/CPP) programs.
03 P.O. Disc 1
04 P.O. Disc 2
05 P.O. Disc 3
Enter any discounts that you regularly receive from this vendor.
Enter the amount in decimals (for example, 10.00 = 10%).
Note: Do not enter a minus sign when entering the discount. If a minus
sign is entered in this field, the price will be increased by the specified
percent.
PO - 128 FPD/203
VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/VM)
![Page 129: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
06 On Order
The value of all open purchase orders for this vendor. This field is
updated by the system and should be modified only to correct an error.
07 Min Ord Amt
Enter a value from .01 to 9999999.99.
This field is for information purposes only. It displays in the Purchase
Order Entry program (PO/PE) for reference, but the PO is created even if
the total dollar amount falls below the amount entered.
08 Ship From
The default is SAME (the address entered in screen 1 of Vendor
Maintenance).
If that address is not the address that the vendor ships from, enter the
ship from address set up for this vendor in Ship From Maintenance
(PO/SFM). You can display the list of valid ship from addresses for this
vendor by using the Look Up function (CMD-L).
If a ship from address has not been set up for this vendor in Ship From
Maintenance (PO/SFM), you can enter one now.
Ship-From Not On File - Do You Want To Add? (Y/N)
This field is displayed if an unrecognizable ship-from address was
entered in the previous field.
Y = The Ship From Maintenance screen is displayed. See the Ship From
Maintenance (PO/POM/SFM) section of the manual for detailed
information.
N = The cursor moves back to the Ship From field.
09 FOB
This entry must be a valid FOB Code from SYCD. You can select from
the list of valid FOB Codes by using the Look Up function (CMD-L).
To leave this field blank, press SKIP.
Error Message:
Invalid Code
The code entered is not on file in the System Code Master File
(SYCD). This entry must be a valid FOB Code that has been defined
in System Code Maintenance (SYCD).
10 Ship Via
The Ship Via Code defines the method of shipping. This entry must be a
valid Ship Via Code from SYCD. You can select from the list of valid
Ship Via Codes by using the Look Up function (CMD-L).
To leave this field blank, press SKIP.
FPD/203 PO - 129
DEFAULT FAX OR EMAIL INFORMATION
![Page 130: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
Error Messages:
Invalid Code
The code entered is not on file in the System Code Master File
(SYCD). This entry must be a valid Via Code that has been defined
in System Code Maintenance (SYCD).
11 On Hold
The default is N. Change this field to Y only if the vendor is a PO vendor
and you do not want to allow POs to be created for this vendor through
Purchase Order Entry and Create Preliminary Purchase Orders (PO/PE,
PO/CPP).
If a vendor is on hold (Y), a PO cannot be created through Purchase
Order Entry (PO/PE) or Create Preliminary Purchase Orders (PO/CPP).
Invoices from the vendor can be entered through Invoice Entry (AP/IE)
and receipts from the vendor can be recorded through Receiving
(REC/RPO, REC/RNO).
12 EDI Vendor
Only applicable if you use EDI.
Y = This vendor is an EDI Vendor.
N = This vendor is not an EDI Vendor.
13 Freight Chgd
Y = Freight is to be charged for this vendor.
N = Freight is not to be charged. You can also leave the field blank.
The default is N for each line entered on a PO or WIP order, and can be
changed.
14 Auto Release
Y = POs created by the Automatic PO process do not need to be
reviewed and can be printed and sent to the vendor.
N = POs are to be reviewed before they can be printed.
17 Mix Product Lines on PO
Y = Multiple product lines can be entered on a single PO.
N = Only one product line can be entered on a single PO.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field entry you want to change.
F1 = Return to the first screen of Vendor Maintenance.
F5 = Access the Print/Fax Parameters screen.
F6 = Access the Message/Notes Maintenance screen for this vendor.
To exit the program completely, press F1 to access the first screen and
use the CMD options.
PO - 130 FPD/203
VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/VM)
![Page 131: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen Three
Field Explanations
DOCUMENT
The types of FASPAC documents that can be faxed: purchase orders,
blanket purchase orders, and vendor requisitions.
The following fields apply to each of these documents.
CONTACT/E-MAIL
Enter the default name that will be used in the Attention field on the
document and cover sheet.
Enter the default E-Mail address that will be used for the document.
Note: You will need additional configuration to set up your E-Mail
system to use this feature.
FAX NUMBER
Enter the default fax number for the document.
OUTPUT TYPE
Enter from one to five output types for each document.
F = Form
P = Plain Paper
X = Fax
M = Mailer
E = E-Mail
FPD/203 PO - 131
DEFAULT FAX OR EMAIL INFORMATION
![Page 132: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen Four
Use this screen to enter global messages or notes for a vendor. They will always
print on the specified documents for this vendor.
Refer to the Messages manual in Volume 5 for more information.
PO - 132 FPD/203
VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/VM)
![Page 133: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
Vendor Listing (PO/VL)
The Vendor Listing program is used to print a list of vendor records.
The Vendor Listing program is available when signed on to a consolidation
company. Only vendors with a record in the Vendor file (PO/VM,
AP/MAR/VM) of the consolidation company are available to be printed.
Running the Consolidate Company Vendor Check program (AP/CHK/CV)
provides a listing of vendors defined in the companies assigned to the
consolidation company that are not defined in the consolidation company.
If some of the vendors do not print when the option to print all vendors in
shortname sequence is selected, check the vendor records in the Vendor file. The
vendors that did not print probably do not have shortnames.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Print For All Vendors? (Y/N)
Y = Print the vendor record information for all vendors in the Vendor
file.
N = Specify a range of vendors for which to print the vendor record
information.
FPD/203 PO - 133
VENDOR LISTING (PO/VL)
![Page 134: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
Print in Number or Shortname Sequence? (N/S)
Select the sequence in which to print the vendor records.
N = Print in vendor number sequence.
S = Print in vendor shortname sequence.
From Number/Shortname
To Number/Shortname
These fields are displayed only if you entered N in the Print For All
Vendors field.
Enter the range of vendor numbers or shortnames (depending on the print
option selected) for which to print the vendor record information.
Do You Want to Print Detail? (Y/N)
Y = Print all the information from the vendor record for each specified
vendor.
N = Print only the name, number, address, phone numbers and fax
number for each specified vendor.
Print All Vendors, Only PO Vendors, Exclude PO Vendors? (A/O/E)
A = Print the vendor record information for all specified vendors.
O = Print the vendor record information only for those specified vendors
who are flagged as P.O. Vendors
E = Print the vendor record information only for those specified vendors
who are not flagged as P.O. Vendors.
Sample Listing
PO - 134 FPD/203
VENDOR LISTING (PO/VL)
SP 213-636-2431
SIERRA PACIFIC SUPPLY CO.
ATTN: LES
1801 WEST EL SEGUNDO BLVD.
COMPTON, CA 90222
A&J 619-562-6862
A & J FORKLIFT
& EQUIPMENT BROKERS
11425 WOODSIDE AVENUE, STE B
SANTEE, CA 92071-4725
ADP
AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING
ATTN: RITA RIGGS
DEPT 701
DENVER, CO 80271-0701
ALL 800-778-7234
ALL ELECTRONICS HARDWARE, INC.
ATTN: TED
90 NORTH LIVELY BLVD
ELK GROVE VILL, IL 60007-1317
![Page 135: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes
(PO/REQ)
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance(PO/REQ/RQM)
The Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance program is used to create new
requisitions, change existing requisitions, and add or change vendor quote
information.
Requisitions can also be created through the Order Desk program (OD) and the
Suggested Reorder Report program (IMR/IMRM/SRR). Requisitions and vendor
quotes created through Order Desk and the Suggested Reorder Report program
can be accessed through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance program.
See the Introduction to the Purchasing module for information on creating
requisitions and vendor quotes through Order Desk and the Suggested Reorder
Report program.
A requisition is created in this program by entering an item in the Requisition
area (upper area) of the screen. A requisition number can be assigned by the
system, you can enter a manual requisition number, or the 000000 number can be
entered to designate that the requisition is for a stock item. Information entered
for each item includes the customer, the quantity, the date wanted, the buyer, a
comment and the date entered.
A Request for Quote Entry can be created for each vendor from whom you want
to receive a quote on the item. An RFQ entry is created in the Vendor Quotes
area (lower area) of the screen. When all eligible or a range of two or more
requisitions are printed through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print program
(PO/REQ/RQP), a request for quote letter prints for each vendor specified in an
RFQ Entry. Creating an RFQ Entry is optional; request for quote letters can be
printed with or without the vendor name and address information regardless of
whether an RFQ Entry is created. See the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print
section of the manual for additional information about printing request for quote
letters.
Quote information received from your vendors is entered in the Vendor Quotes
area of the screen. Vendor quote information can also be entered through the
Vendor Quote Maintenance program (PO/REQ/VQM).
If a purchase order is to be created through the Create Preliminary Purchase
Orders program (PO/CPP) from a vendor quote, that vendor quote must be
flagged with a P (for preferred) in the PO Status field, in the Vendor Quotes area
of the screen. See the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders (PO/CPP) section of
the manual for additional information regarding creating purchase orders from
vendor quotes.
FPD/203 PO - 135
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 136: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
Requisition Area - Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number in which to create new requisitions, change
existing requisitions, or enter vendor quote information.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP.
Req
The next sequential number to be assigned by the system is displayed.
To create a new requisition, accept this number by pressing RETURN.
To assign a new manual requisition number, enter one alpha character
followed by up to five numeric characters.
To use the stock requisition number, enter 000000 or press SKIP. This
number can be used again and again to store requisitions for stock items.
To work with an existing requisition number, enter the number and press
RETURN. The customer is displayed and the cursor moves to the Item
field.
Requisition Not Found - Create New Requisition? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the requisition number entered is not in the
Requisition File.
Y = Create a new requisition using this number.
N = Return to the Req field without creating a new requisition using this
number.
PO - 136 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 137: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
Cust
The cursor moves to this field only if you are creating a new requisition.
Enter the name or number of the customer that the order is for. If you are
unsure of the complete customer name or number, you may access the
list of valid customers by entering the first few characters of their name,
customer number, or phone number and pressing the appropriate function
key (F1 to search based on the customer number, F2 to search based on
the customer name, and F5 to search based on the phone number). Once
a valid customer is displayed, use F3 to scroll forward and F4 to scroll
backward through the list.
To accept the displayed customer, press RETURN.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry, Function, or End of File...SKIP
Either an invalid customer was entered, the wrong function key was
pressed, or the end of file was reached while scrolling through the
Customer File.
Press SKIP and either begin again or exit this program.
Item
Enter the FASPAC number, shortname, or cross-reference number of the
item for which you are creating the requisition. If you are using a
cross-reference number, remember to enter “!” first. If you are unsure of
the complete item number or shortname, you may access the list of items
by entering the first few characters of either and pressing the appropriate
function key (F1 to access the list based on the item number, F2 to access
the list based on the item shortname). Once a valid item is displayed, use
F3 to scroll forward and F4 to scroll backward through the list (scrolling
is based on how you enter the item).
To accept the displayed item, press RETURN.
If you are pulling up an existing requisition the cursor moves directly to
the SELECT field. If you are creating a new requisition the cursor moves
to through each of the following fields.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry or Function...SKIP
Either an invalid item was entered or the wrong function key was
pressed.
Press SKIP and begin again.
Quantity
Enter the quantity of the item you need.
FPD/203 PO - 137
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES MAINTENANCE (PO/REQ/RQM)
![Page 138: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
Date Want
If you are creating the requisition now, the Sign On Date is displayed. If
the requisition was created in Order Desk, this date is either the Sign On
Date when created or the date entered as the item date wanted.
Buyer
This field is optional. You can enter the name of the buyer or leave this
field blank. When working in the Requisition Print program
(PO/REQ/RQP), you may select to print this field.
Comment
This field is optional. You can enter any applicable comments or leave
this field blank. When working in the Requisition Print Program
(PO/REQ/RQP), you may select to print this field.
Date Ent
If you are creating the requisition now, the Sign On Date is displayed.
Press RETURN to accept this date or enter another date using the
MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format.
Quote
Line
These fields are optional and can be left blank. If the requisition was
created through the Order Desk program, these fields are updated by the
system.
Order
Line
These fields are optional and can be left blank. If the requisition was
created through Order Desk, these fields are updated by the system.
Error Message:
Cust Order and Line Not Found...SKIP
The customer order and line number entered is not on file.
Press SKIP and begin again.
Price
If the requisition was created through the Order Desk program, this field
is automatically updated with the amount entered as the selling price.
PO Stat
This field is automatically updated with P if a purchase order is created
through the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP).
PO - 138 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 139: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
PO No.
This field is updated by the system if a purchase order is created through
the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP).
Error Message:
P.O. Found
The purchase order number entered is not found in the Purchase
Order file. Press SKIP and begin again.
Vend
This field is updated by the system if a purchase order is created through
the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP).
SELECT
Press RETURN to accept GO and enter vendor quote information. The
cursor moves to the Vendor field in the Vendor quote area (lower area)
of the screen.
To change one of the displayed entries, enter the field number.
To delete the displayed item and information, enter DE.
To exit without entering vendor quote information, press SKIP. The
cursor moves to the Item field. You can enter another item or press SKIP
again to exit completely.
The following fields are updated by the system and cannot be
changed.
Prt Status
Blank = This requisition was created through Requisitions/Vendor
Quotes Maintenance (PO/REQ/RQM) and has not been printed.
Q = This requisition was created through Order Desk (OD) and has not
been printed.
I = This requisition was created through Suggested Reorder Report
(IMR/IMRM/SRR) and has not been printed.
P = This requisition has been printed through Requisition/Vendor Quotes
Print (PO/REQ/RQR).
UM
The unit of measure defined in the Item Master Record (IM/MAI, screen
one) is displayed.
Vend
The Vendor Code displays based on the purchase order number entered
in the PO No field.
FPD/203 PO - 139
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES MAINTENANCE (PO/REQ/RQM)
![Page 140: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
Vendor Quote Area - Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Information
Vendor
You can request a quote on the displayed item from multiple vendors.
However, each vendor must be entered one at a time.
Enter the first vendor from whom you want to receive a quote for the
displayed item. You can indicate the vendor by name or number. If you
are unsure of the complete vendor name or number you can access the
complete list of vendors by entering the first few characters of either the
name or number and pressing the appropriate function key (F1 to access
the list based on the vendor number, F2 to access the list based on the
vendor name). Once a valid vendor is displayed, use F3 to scroll forward
and F4 to scroll back through the Vendor file. To accept the displayed
vendor, press RETURN.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry, Function, or End of File...SKIP
Either an invalid vendor was entered, the wrong function key was
pressed, or the end of file was reached while scrolling through the
Vendor file.
PO - 140 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 141: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
From
The default Ship-From, defined in the Vendor file (PO/VM,
AP/MAR/VM) is displayed.
Press RETURN to accept this code or enter another valid code from the
Ship-From Master File (PO/POM/SFM).
If you are unsure of the valid Ship-From Codes for this vendor, you may
access the list by entering the first character of a Ship-From Code and
pressing F1. Once a valid Ship-From Code displays, use F3 to scroll
forward and F4 to scroll back through the list. Once you locate the
desired Ship-From Code, press RETURN.
Press SKIP and either begin again or exit this program.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry or Function...SKIP
Either an invalid Ship From was entered or the wrong function key
was pressed.
Press SKIP and begin again.
Enter Function A - Add, B - Build RFQ Entry, C - Change/Delete, SKIP to
Exit
A = You have already received the quote from the vendor. The cursor
moves through each field so that you can enter the appropriate
information. If you have not sent out requests for quotes yet, use option
B or exit at this time.
B = You want to build a Request For Quote (RFQ). This option builds an
entry that will produce requests for quote letters when the
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print program (PO/REQ/RQP) is run for all
eligible or for a range of two or more. When this option is selected, the
following fields are automatically updated by the system: Rate, Cost,
Um, Quote Date, Delivery Date, and Close Date, and the cursor moves
directly to the SELECT field. If you use option B now, you will use
option C when you enter the information received from your vendor.
C = Change or delete existing quote information. The cursor moves to
the Line field.
Enter the line number assigned to this vendor for the item on this
requisition. The vendor information previously entered is displayed and
the cursor moves to the SELECT field.
The cursor moves through the following fields if you selected option
A.
Quote
This field is optional. You can enter the vendor quote number or leave
this field blank.
FPD/203 PO - 141
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES MAINTENANCE (PO/REQ/RQM)
![Page 142: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
Quantity
The quantity entered in the Requisition area is displayed. If this is the
quantity on which this vendor quoted you, press RETURN to accept the
number. If this is not the quantity on which this vendor quoted you,
change the number and press SKIP.
Curr Code
If the vendor will be quoting you prices in a foreign currency, enter the
currency code. This must be a valid Currency Code in the System Code
Master File (SYCD) - Record Type CU.
IMPORTANT: If you are creating POs from this quote, you must leave
this field blank.
Rate
The exchange rate defined in the System Master File for this code is
displayed.
Cost
Enter the cost (.01 - 9999999.9999) of the item per the unit of measure.
UM
The unit of measure in the Item Master Record (IM/MAI) is displayed.
If this is the unit of measure on which the item was quoted, press
RETURN to accept it.
If this is not the unit of measure on which the item was quoted, change it
and press SKIP.
Comment
This field is optional. You can enter a comment of up to 30 characters or
leave this field blank and press SKIP.
Quote Date
The sign-on date is displayed. Press RETURN to accept this date or
change the quote date using the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format.
Del Date
The sign-on date is displayed. Press RETURN to accept this date or
change the delivery date using the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format.
This is the delivery date as per the vendor.
Effect Days
Enter the number of days this quote is effective. The close date is
calculated based on this entry. If this field is left blank, the close date
becomes the same date as the Quote Date.
PO - 142 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 143: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
Close Date
This date is calculated by adding the number in the Effect Days field to
the date in the Quote Date field. The Close Date can be changed by
editing either the entry in the Quote Date field or the entry in the Effect
Days field.
PO Status
Enter P or leave this field blank and press SKIP.
Entering P in this field flags the vendor quote as preferred so that a
purchase order is created next time the Create Preliminary Purchase
Orders program (PO/CPP) is run.
Save Flag
Y = the vendor quote is saved when the Requisitions Vendor Quote
Delete program (PO/REQ/RQD) is run, regardless of the date in the
Close Date field.
Select
Enter the line number of the field entry you want to change.
To accept the quote information as displayed, press SKIP. The cursor
returns to the Quote field.
If this vendor has quoted you on different quantities for this item, enter
another line on this quote with the information on the next quantity.
If you do not have more quote information to enter for this vendor, press
CMD while the cursor is in the Quote field.
Continue to press CMD until you reach the desired field or you exit the
program.
Line
The cursor moves to this field only if you selected option C.
Enter the line number on the quote that you want to change or delete.
If you are unsure of the line number, enter one digit and press F1 to
access the list of line numbers. Once a valid line number displays, press
F3 to scroll forward and F4 to scroll back through the list. As you scroll
through each of the lines, the quote information is displayed. To accept
the displayed line, press RETURN.
Once a valid line number is accepted, the cursor moves to the SELECT
field.
FPD/203 PO - 143
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES MAINTENANCE (PO/REQ/RQM)
![Page 144: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Inquiry (PO/REQ/RQI)
The Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Inquiry program is used to display requisition
and vendor quote information for a specific item and warehouse. The
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Inquiry program can also be accessed through the
Part Inquiry program (PI).
Once the item is entered, all requisitions for the item are displayed in the
Requisition Inquiry Screen. You can display all vendor quotes or specific vendor
quotes for a requisition.
The information displayed in each screen is from the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes
File (PO/REQ/RQM). No changes can be made through this program. Some of
the information can be changed through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes
Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM). See the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes
Maintenance (PO/REQ/RQM) section of the manual for detailed information.
Entry/Inquiry Screen One
PO - 144 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 145: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number from which to display requisition and
vendor quote information for a specific item.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP or CMD.
Item
Enter the item for which to display requisition and vendor quote
information. You can enter an inventory item or a non-inventory item. If
you are entering an inventory item, you may enter the FASPAC item
number, shortname, Description Code, or cross-reference number.
To access the list of inventory items, enter part of the FASPAC item
number or Description Code and press F1, or enter part of the shortname
and press F2. Once a valid item is displayed, use F3 to scroll forward and
F4 to scroll back through the list. Once you locate the desired item, press
RETURN.
If you want to enter an item using the cross-reference number, remember
to enter an exclamation mark (!) before the number.
If you want to enter a non-inventory item, remember to enter an asterisk
(*) before the number.
Once an item is entered, all requisitions on file for the item and
warehouse display.
SELECT
The function keys can be used to scroll through the displayed list of
requisitions.
F3 = Scrolls forward through the list.
F1 = Redisplays the list from the beginning.
Once the desired requisition is located, enter the number in the SELECT
field. The Vendor Quote Inquiry screen (screen two) displays so that you
can view the vendor quotes for this requisition.
To view the vendor quotes of all displayed requisitions, leave this field
blank and press SKIP.
See the following pages for information on the Vendor Quote Inquiry
screen.
FPD/203 PO - 145
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES INQUIRY (PO/REQ/RQI)
![Page 146: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen Two
Field Explanation
SELECT
The function keys can be used to scroll through the list of vendor quotes
and display additional information.
F3 scrolls forward through the list.
F1 redisplays the list of vendor quotes from the beginning.
F8 allows you to display the cost per unit of measure (UM) or the cost
per pound (LB). If the cost per UM is currently displayed, pressing F8
will display the cost per LB. If the cost per LB is currently displayed,
pressing F8 will display the cost per UM.
To return to the Requisition Inquiry screen (screen one), press SKIP.
PO - 146 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 147: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
Status Codes—Purchase Orders
There are four status codes associated with purchase orders. These status codes
are updated by the system and they are:
• New—Only the purchase order header was created - no detail line items
have been added to the purchase order.
• Open—Receiving has not been done on any of the line items on this
purchase order.
• Partial Rec’d—Receiving has been done on one or more line items. If all
balances are 0, the incorrect method to exit the RPO program was used.
• Complete—Lines on this purchase order have been received, and the
balance of the purchase order was REC or CAN.
Status Codes—Printed Purchase Orders
• Duplicate—This purchase order has been previously printed.
• Heading Change—Changes were made to the header through the
Maintenance program (PO/PM).
• Line Change—Information on one or more line items was changed
through the Line Maintenance program (PO/PL). If a heading change and
a line change are made, only the Line Change status code prints.
FPD/203 PO - 147
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES INQUIRY (PO/REQ/RQI)
![Page 148: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print (PO/REQ/RQP)
The Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print program prints requests for vendor quotes
in letter format. When vendor responses are received, the information can be
quickly entered through the Vendor Quote Maintenance program
(PO(/REQ/VQM).
Vendor quote requests can be printed for all eligible requisitions or for a specific
range of requisition numbers only. An eligible requisition has not had a request
for a quote letter printed. See the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance
(PO/REQ/RQM) section of the manual for more information on Request For
Quote (RFQ) Entries.
If you are printing letters for all eligible or a range of two or more requisition
numbers, two requests are generated:
one without vendor name and address information, all items included; quantity
printed is the requisition quantity.
one for each vendor entry made through one of the Requisition/Vendor Quote
Maintenance programs (PO/REQ/RQM, PO/REQ/VQM); only line items without
a cost or quote number are included; quantity printed is the vendor quantity. If
the vendor quantity is zero, the requisition quantity is used.
If you are printing letters for a specific requisition number, two requests are
generated:
• one without vendor name and address information; all items included;
quantity printed is the requisition quantity.
• one for each vendor specified; all items included; quantity printed is the
requisition quantity.
You can include or exclude your company address on the requisitions. If your
system includes the Fax Modem module, requisitions can be faxed directly to
your vendor in addition to or instead of printing them. If printed without vendor
information, the same request for quote letter can be faxed to different vendors. If
you select to print your company address, the warehouse address from the
Warehouse File (PO/POM/WAM) is used. If no warehouse address is defined in
the Warehouse File, the company address from the System File (SYS/CIS) is
used.
You are given the option of including FASPAC item numbers, comments and
notes. The notes print after the item description.
PO - 148 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 149: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Do You Want To Continue? (Y/N)
Y = Continue in this program.
N = Exit the program.
Whse
Enter the warehouse number in which the requisitions are located.
To include requisitions in all warehouses, leave this field blank and press
SKIP.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press CMD.
Date
The sign on date is displayed. Press RETURN to accept this date or
enter another date using the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format. This
date prints on the request letters.
Print To (P/X/E/D)
P = Print the request letters on plain paper only.
X = Fax the request letters only.
Note: The fax option is available only if your system includes the Fax
Modem module.
FPD/203 PO - 149
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES PRINT (PO/REQ/RQP)
![Page 150: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
E = Send the request letters to the vendor’s e-mail address specified in
POM/SFM or AP/MAR/VM. If an e-mail address cannot be found, you
are prompted to enter one.
D = Send the request letters to the Default output devices specified in
POM/SFM or AP/MAR/VM. If output devices have not been specified,
you are prompted to enter one or more.
Note: You can specify more than one Default device, such as Form and
E-mail.
Print Your Company Address? (Y/N)
Y = the warehouse address prints if it is defined in the Warehouse File
(PO/POM/WAM), otherwise, the company address defined in the System
File (SYS/CIS) is used.
N = No address is printed on the letter.
Default Salutation
This name prints only if the vendor does not have a contact defined in the
Vendor file (PO/VM, AP/MAR/VM) or if you are printing without
vendor information.
Default Signed By
The characters entered in this field print only if the Buyer field in the
requisition is blank. If you do not want a default name to print, leave this
field blank and press RETURN
Print FASPAC Item Number? (Y/N)
Y = Print the FASPAC Item Number above Item Description.
N = Do not include FASPAC Item number.
Print Comment? (Y/N)
Y = Print the comment entered for the item in the Maintenance programs
(PO/REQ/RQM, PO/REQ/VQM).
N = Do not print any comments on the letter.
Print Notes? (Y/N)
Y = Print the purchase order notes entered for this item in Order Desk
(OD).
N = Do not print notes for this item.
Note: The notes print after the item description.
PO - 150 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 151: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
Internal External, or Both? (I/E/B)
This field is available only if you selected to print notes (Y entered in the
field above).
I = Print internal notes only.
E = Print external notes only.
B = Print both, internal and external notes.
Print All Eligible Orders?
Y = Print request letters for all eligible requisitions.
N = Specify a range of requisition numbers for which to print request
letters.
From Req No
Thru Req No
These fields are displayed only if you are printing the letters for a
RANGE of requisition numbers.
Enter the range of requisition numbers for which to print quote request
letters.
To print letters for one requisition number only, enter the same
characters in both fields.
Do You Want To Continue? (Y/N)
Y = Print the request letters as specified.
N = Exit the program without printing the request letters.
Want a Test Pattern? (Y/N)
Y = Print a test pattern before printing the letters.
N = Print the letters immediately, without printing a test pattern first.
One copy of each request prints without a vendor name and address. This
copy should be retained for your files. Once the system has finished printing,
the first requisition number is displayed and the cursor moves through the
following two fields.
Print For Vend
Specify the name of the vendor to be printed on the displayed request.
You can access the Vendor file by entering the first few characters of the
vendor name or number and pressing the appropriate function key. Once
a valid vendor is displayed, press F3 to scroll forward through the list,
and F4 to scroll back through the list. To accept the displayed vendor,
press RETURN.
To print another copy of this request without a vendor name and address,
press SKIP.
To exit, press CMD.
PO - 151 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 152: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
Ship From
The default ship from address in the Vendor Master File is displayed.
You can accept this address or enter another valid ship from address.
At Fax Number
This field is displayed only if you selected to fax the requests to your
vendors.
The fax number in the Ship From Record (PO/POM/SFM) is displayed.
Press RETURN to accept this number or enter another number.
Sending Fax To
This field is updated by the system and cannot be changed.
The name of the vendor to whom the requisition is being faxed.
Sample Quote Request
PO - 152 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
Requisition No. 00743 Page 1
BEST FASTENERS, INC.20TH ANNIVERSARY **1976-1996**
2950 NATIONAL AVENUESAN DIEGO, CA 92113619-231-5966 Fax - 619-231-7528
JUL 25, 1996
Dear :
Please quote price and delivery on the following items:
Quantity Item Date Required
80 50C200HCSZ 08/07/951/2-13 X 2 HEX C/S SILI BRNZ
80 50CNFHZ 08/07/951/2-13 FINISHED HEX NUT SILI BRNZ
In reply please refer to requisition number 00743. Thank you.
BEST FASTENERS, INC.
![Page 153: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Listing(PO/REQ/RQL)
The Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Listing program produces a listing that is useful
in tracking requisitions and vendor quotes.
The listing can be printed in requisition number, item or customer sequence. All
or a range of the selected sequence can be printed. The listing can also be printed
for all or a range of dates, in one or all warehouses. The cost per unit of measure
or per pound prints for each item.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
WHSE
Enter the warehouse number from which to print a list of requisitions and
vendor quotes.
To include requisitions in all warehouses, leave this field blank and press
SKIP.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press CMD.
FPD/203 PO - 153
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES LISTING (PO/REQ/RQL)
![Page 154: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
Print By Req, Item or Customer? (R/I/C)
Select the sequence in which to print the listing.
C = Print the listing in customer number sequence.
I = Print the listing in FASPAC item number or Description Code
sequence.
R = Print the listing in requisition number sequence.
Print For All Requisitions?/Items?/Customers? (Y/N)
Y = Print the listing for all requisition numbers, item numbers, or
customers in the file.
N = Specify a range of requisition numbers, item numbers, or customers
to include on the listing.
Print From Requisition/Print From Item/Print From Customer
To Requisition/Item/Customer
These fields are displayed only if you entered N in the Print For All
Requisitions/Items/ Customers field.
Enter the range of requisition numbers, item numbers, or customer
numbers (depending on the sequence selected) to include on the listing.
Note: If printing in Req sequence, enter up to 6 alphanumeric characters;
if printing in Item sequence, enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters; if
printing in Customer Number sequence, enter up to 5 alphanumeric
characters.
Print For All Dates? (Y/N)
Y = Include all specified requisitions, regardless of the date.
N = Include only those requisitions that have a specific date.
Print From Date
To Date
These fields are displayed only if you entered N in the Print For All
Dates field.
Enter the range of dates to include on the listing. You must enter each
date in the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format. Only those requisitions
that have a date that falls into the range specified in these fields will be
included on the listing.
Print Cost/LB or Cost/UM? (L/U)
Select the cost to include on the listing.
L = Print the cost per pound of each item.
U = Print the cost per UM of each item.
PO - 154 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 155: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
Note: The cost per pound prints only if the weight is defined in the Item
File (IM/MAI).
Print Notes? (Y/N)
Y = Include notes on the listing.
Print Internal, External Or Both? (I/E/B)
This field is displayed if you entered Y in the previous field.
I = Print only internal notes.
E = Print only external notes.
B = Print both internal and external notes.
Do You Want To Continue?
Y = Print the listing as specified.
N = Exit the program without printing the listing.
FPD/203 PO - 155
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES LISTING (PO/REQ/RQL)
![Page 156: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
Sample Report
PO - 156 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
COMPANY: 10 BEST FASTENERS, INC. PAGE 1
RUN ID: RQL REQUISITION QUOTE LISTING 07/25/96
RUN BY: WPD BY REQUISITION 15:56:07 03/25/97
WH REQ CUST
ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY PRICE UM PRT ST
ENTERED WANTED BY CHG BUYER QUOTE ORDER P.O. VEND COMMENT PO ST
VEND SHIP LINE QUOTED DELIVERY CLOSE QTY COST UM CURR RATE VQUOTE BY PRT PO COMMENT
================================================================================================================================
01 00743 230 INVALID CUSTOMER
50C200HCSZ 1/2-13 X 2 HEX C/S SILI BRNZ 80 122.00 C P
08/07/95 08/07/95 TLO 09126/001
STAR 01 001 08/07/95 08/07/95 08/07/95 80 61.0000 C TLO QUOTED BY RITA
50CNFHZ 1/2-13 FINISHED HEX NUT SILI BRNZ 80 .00 C P
08/07/95 08/07/95 TLO 09129/002
STAR 01 001 08/07/95 08/07/95 08/07/95 80 19.0000 C TLO
STAR 01 002 08/07/95 08/07/95 08/07/95 80 19.0000 C TLO
01 01656 STOCK
50C125HCS8Y 1/2-13 X 1 1/4 HEX C/S GR 8 ZINC II 100 .00 C P
02/27/96 02/27/96 TLO TERRI
50C200HCS8Y 1/2-13 X 2 HEX C/S GR 8 ZINC II 50 .00 C P
02/27/96 02/27/96 TLO TERRI
50C250HCS8Y 1/2-13 X 2 1/2 HEX C/S GR 8 ZINC II 100 .00 C P
02/27/96 02/27/96 TLO TERRI
50C350HCS8Y 1/2-13 X 3 1/2 HEX C/S GR 8 ZINC II 50 .00 C P
02/27/96 02/27/96 TLO TERRI
01 02030 STOCK
4C37KFCS 4-40 X 3/8 FLAT SOCKET C/S 18-8 S/S 2000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
8C37KFCS 8-32 X 3/8 FLAT SOCKET C/S 18-8 S/S 5000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
2NLOCS #2 SPLIT LOCKWASHER 18-8 S/S 30000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
2C18MPFS 2-56 X 3/16 PHIL FLAT M/S 18-8 S/S 10000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
6C25MPFS 6-32 X 1/4 PHIL FLAT M/S 18-8 S/S 10000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
6C50MPFS 6-32 X 1/2 PHIL FLAT M/S 18-8 S/S 10000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TLO TERRI
6C75MPFS 6-32 X 3/4 PHIL FLAT M/S 18-8 S/S 5000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/15/96 TLO
8C25MPFS/UC 8-32 X 1/4 PHIL FLAT M/S UNDERCUT 18-8 S/S 10000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
8C37MPFS 8-32 X 3/8 PHIL FLAT M/S 18-8 S/S 20000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
8C62MPFS 8-32 X 5/8 PHIL FLAT M/S 18-8 S/S 5000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
8C125MPFS 8-32 X 1 1/4 PHIL FLAT M/S 18-8 S/S 500 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
10F62MPFS 10-32 X 5/8 PHIL FLAT M/S 18-8 S/S 5000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
10F75MPFS 10-32 X 3/4 PHIL FLAT M/S 18-8 S/S 5000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/15/96 TLO
2C37MPPS 2-56 X 3/8 PHIL PAN M/S 18-8 S/S 5000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
6C12MPPS 6-32 X 1/8 PHIL PAN M/S 18-8 S/S 2000 .00 C P
05/15/96 05/16/96 TLO TERRI
8C18MPPS 8-32 X 3/16 PHIL PAN M/S 18-8 S/S 5000 .00 C P
![Page 157: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Delete(PO/REQ/RQD)
The Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Delete program is used to delete vendor quotes
that are not flagged to be saved and that have a close date equal to or prior to the
date specified. In order to delete a vendor quote that is flagged to be saved, you
must change the flag in the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance program
(PO/REQ/RQM).
If all vendor quotes on a requisition are deleted, the requisition is also deleted. If
a requisition has no vendor quotes, it can not be deleted through this program.
You must use the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance program
(PO/REQ/RQM).
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Delete Thru Closed Date
The sign on date is displayed.
Press RETURN to accept this date or enter another date in the
MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format. Only those vendor quotes that
have a close date that is before or equal to the date entered in this field
will be deleted.
To exit the program without deleting any vendor quotes, press SKIP
while the cursor is on the first character.
FPD/203 PO - 157
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES DELETE (PO/REQ/RQD)
![Page 158: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
Continue? Y
Y = Delete all vendor quotes that are not flagged to be saved and that
have a close date equal to or prior to the date entered in the field above.
If all vendor quotes for a requisition are deleted, that requisition is also
deleted.
N = Exit the program without deleting any vendor quotes.
PO - 158 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 159: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
Inquire By Requisition Number (PO/REQ/RQRR)
The Inquire By Requisition Number program displays the list of requisitions
created during a specific time period. You must specify the date range and the
warehouse in which to locate the requisitions.
Requisitions created within the specified time period display in item number
sequence.
Entry/Inquiry Screen One
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number from which to display the list of
requisitions. A valid warehouse number must be entered.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP.
Error Message:
Invalid Warehouse Number. SKIP
The warehouse number entered has not been set up as a valid system
warehouse.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and enter a valid
warehouse number.
FPD/203 PO - 159
INQUIRE BY REQUISITION NUMBER (PO/REQ/RQRR)
![Page 160: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
The following two fields are used to select the date range from which
to display the list of requisitions.
From Date
The sign on date is displayed. Press RETURN to accept this date or
enter another date using the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format.
To begin displaying the list with the first requisition in the file, press
SKIP while the cursor is on the first character in the field (00/00/00
displays).
Thru Date
The date entered in the From Date field is displayed. If you want to
display the list of requisitions created on this day only, press RETURN
to accept the displayed date, otherwise enter the date with which to end
the date range (using the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format).
To end the list with the last requisition in the file, press SKIP while the
cursor is on the first character in the field (99/99/99 displays).
Once a valid entry is made in this field, the list of requisitions is
displayed and the cursor moves to the SELECT field.
SELECT
To display the list of requisitions for a specific item, enter the
corresponding line number. See Screen 2 below.
F1 = Redisplays the list from the beginning. This function can only be
used if F3 was previously used to scroll through the list.
F3 = Scrolls forward through the list of requisitions.
To return to the Whse field, leave this field blank and press SKIP. Once
at the Whse field, you may begin again or exit the program completely
by pressing SKIP again.
PO - 160 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 161: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen Two
Field Explanation
SELECT
To display vendor quote information for a specific requisition, enter the
number.
To view vendor information for all displayed quotes, press SKIP. See
Screen 3 below.
F1 = Re-displays the list of requisitions from the beginning.
CMD = Returns the cursor to screen one.
FPD/203 PO - 161
INQUIRE BY REQUISITION NUMBER (PO/REQ/RQRR)
![Page 162: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen Three
Field Explanation
SELECT
F8 = toggles between displaying the cost per UM and the cost per pound.
Press SKIP to return to screen two.
PO - 162 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 163: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
Requisitions/Vendor Maintenance (PO/REQ/VQM)
The Requisitions/Vendor Maintenance program is used to quickly enter the
vendor response information received from the request for quote letters generated
through the Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance program (PO/REQ/RQM).
This program can also be used to quickly change the PO Status Code so that
purchase orders can be created through the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders
program (PO/CPP).
To enter vendor quote information, enter the requisition number followed by the
vendor, the quote number, the quote date, the delivery date, and the effective
days. Once this information has been entered, the first item on the requisition
displays so that cost, comment and PO Status information can be entered.
Cost, comment and PO Status information should be entered for each item on the
requisition as the item is displayed. The cursor automatically moves through each
of these fields. You can change the date entered in the quote date, delivery date,
and effective days fields by selecting the appropriate field.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number in which to add or edit the vendor quotes. A
valid warehouse number must be entered.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP or CMD.
FPD/203 PO - 163
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/REQ/VQM)
![Page 164: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
Req. No.
Enter the requisition number on which to add or edit the vendor quotes.
Error Message:
Requisition Not On File...SKIP
The requisition number entered is not in the Requisition File.
Press SKIP to acknowledge the message and begin again.
Vendor
Enter the vendor the quote is from.
If you are unsure of the complete vendor name or number, you can
access the list of vendors by entering the first few characters of either the
name or number and pressing the appropriate function key (F1 to access
the list based on the vendor number, F2 to access the list based on the
vendor name). Once a valid vendor is displayed, use F3 to scroll forward
and F4 to scroll back through the Vendor file. To accept the displayed
vendor, press RETURN.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry, Function, or End of File...SKIP
Either an invalid vendor was entered, the wrong function key was
pressed, or the end of the file was reached while scrolling through
the Vendor file.
Press SKIP and either begin again or exit this program.
From
The default Ship-From, defined in the Vendor Record (PO/VM, PO/PM,
SFM, AP/MAR/VM) is displayed.
You can accept the displayed code by pressing RETURN or enter
another valid Ship-From Code for this vendor. If you are unsure of the
valid Ship-From Codes for this vendor, you can access the list by
entering the first character of a code and pressing F1. Once another valid
Ship-From is displayed, press F3 to scroll forward and F4 to scroll back
through the list. “End Of File” displays when you have reached the last
code in the file.
To accept the displayed Ship-From Code, press RETURN.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry or Function...SKIP
Either an invalid Ship From Code was entered or the wrong function
key was pressed.
Press SKIP and begin again.
PO - 164 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 165: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
Quote
Enter the quote number you are entering/editing.
Quote Date
The sign on date is displayed. If this is the date on the quote, accept it by
pressing RETURN. If not, enter the date in the MMDDYY or
MMDDYYYY format.
Del Date
The date entered in the Quote Date field is displayed. If this is the
delivery date on the quote, accept it by pressing RETURN. If not, enter
the date in the MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format.
Effect Days
Enter the number of days this quote is in effect. The Close Date is
calculated based on this entry. If this field is left blank, the Close Date is
calculated to be the same date as the Quote Date.
Note: The requisition item automatically is displayed once this field
entry is accepted. Double check to make sure you are entering the vendor
quote information for the correct item.
If you are entering New vendor quote, the cursor moves through each
of the following fields.
If you are editing an existing vendor quote, the cursor moves directly to the
SELECT field.
Cost
Enter the cost (up to 999999999.99) of the item per the unit of measure.
Note: If the Vendor Record (for the specified vendor) is flagged to use a
Vendor Price Table, the Vendor Pricing displays. You can accept this
price or enter a new one.
UM
The unit of measure from the Item Master Record (IM/MAI, screen one)
is displayed. If this is the unit of measure on which the item was quoted,
press RETURN to accept it. If not, enter the appropriate unit of measure.
Comment
This field is optional. You can enter any comments/notes you want to
record with this quote, or leave this field blank and press SKIP.
FPD/203 PO - 165
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR MAINTENANCE (PO/REQ/VQM)
![Page 166: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
PO Status
You can enter P or leave this field blank. Entering P in this field flags
this vendor quote as preferred, so that a purchase order is created the next
time the Create Preliminary Purchase Orders program (PO/CPP) is run.
Qty
The quantity entered in the Requisition area (first section) of the
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Maintenance screen (PO/REQ/RQM) is
displayed.
Select
Enter the line number of the field entry you want to change.
To accept the vendor quote information as displayed, leave this field
blank and press CMD. The cursor returns to the Vendor field. At this
point, you may enter/edit another vendor quote or press SKIP to exit the
program.
The following fields are updated by the system and cannot be
changed.
Item
The items and their descriptions originally entered on this requisition
display after an entry has been made in the Effect Days field.
Line
The system assigns a line number to each vendor quote on a requisition.
Pr Status
blank = A request for quote letter has not bee printed for this vendor.
P = A request for quote letter has been printed through the
Requisitions/Vendor Quotes Print program (PO/REQ/RQP).
PO - 166 FPD/203
REQUISITIONS/VENDOR QUOTES (PO/REQ)
![Page 167: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
Miscellaneous (POM)
Ship From Maintenance (PO/POM/SFM)
Use the Ship From Maintenance program to add, modify, or delete the Ship From
record of a PO vendor. The Ship From Maintenance program can be accessed
directly or from Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM or AP/MAR/VM). Each record
consists of two screens.
The first screen displays vendor information. You assign the ship-from address
number and enter the address information.
The second screen contains information for printing, faxing, or emailing purchase
orders, blanket purchase orders, and vendor requisitions. Display it by pressing
F5. For more information about faxing, see Faxing Documents below.
A PO vendor often has one remit-to address and one or more ship-from
addresses. In this situation, the Vendor Record must be set up in Vendor
Maintenance using the remit-to address and each ship-from address must be set
up through Ship From Maintenance (either directly or through Vendor
Maintenance). If a vendor has more than one remit-to address, a Vendor Record
must be set up for each address in the Vendor file. The Ship From used most
often should be entered as the default in Vendor Maintenance.
All of the ship-from addresses are available for use in Purchase Order Entry
(PO/PE) and Purchase Order Inquiry (PO/INQ).
Default Fax or Email Information
When you fax or email a purchase order or blanket purchase order, the system
checks for default fax information in the following order:
• Vendor Ship From Maintenance (PO/POM/SFM) screen two is checked
first.
• If nothing is found in screen two, it checks PO/POM/SFM screen one.
• If nothing is found in PO/POM/SFM, it then checks Vendor Maintenance
(AP/MAR/VM) screen three.
• If nothing is found in AP/MAR/VM screen three, it checks the purchase
order or blanket purchase order for the contact.
• If nothing is found in the purchase order, it checks AP/MAR/VM screen
one.
• If no entries are found in AP/MAR/VM screen one, you are prompted for
the required information when you fax the document.
FPD/203 PO - 167
SHIP FROM MAINTENANCE (PO/POM/SFM)
![Page 168: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
When you fax or email a vendor requisition, the system checks for default fax
information in the following order:
• Vendor Maintenance (AP/MAR/VM) screen three is checked first.
• If nothing is found in AP/MAR/VM screen three, it checks AP/MAR/VM
screen one.
• If nothing is found in AP/MAR/VM screen one, it looks for the
requisition’s default salutation.
• If the requisition’s default is not found, you are prompted for the required
information when you fax the document.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Vend
Enter the vendor number for which to create, edit, or delete a Ship From
Code. If you are unsure of the complete vendor number you can access
the list of vendors by using the function keys or the Look-Up function
(CMD-L).
To access the list of vendors using the function keys, enter the first few
characters of the vendor name or number and press the appropriate
function key. Once a valid vendor is displayed, use F3 to scroll forward
and F4 to scroll back through the Vendor file. To accept the displayed
vendor, press RETURN.
To exit the program, leave this field blank and press SKIP.
PO - 168 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 169: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
Error Messages:
End of File. . .SKIP
The end of the Vendor file was reached while scrolling.
Press SKIP and begin again.
Invalid Entry or Function. . .SKIP
An invalid Vendor Code was entered or the wrong function key was
pressed.
Press SKIP and begin again.
From
Enter the Ship-From Code you want to create, edit, or delete. If you enter
a Ship From that is already on file, the appropriate information is
displayed and the cursor moves directly to the SELECT field. If the Ship
From is not already on file, the cursor moves through each of the
following fields so that the current information can be entered.
Is This A New Ship-From? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the Ship From Code entered in the field
above is not in the Ship From Master File.
Y = Set up this code as a valid Ship From Code for the displayed vendor.
N = Return the cursor to the From field. The information in the Vendor
file is displayed in the lower half of the screen. As the cursor moves
through each of the following fields, you can accept the displayed
information or change it.
12 Name
The vendor’s name is displayed.
13 Addr
14 Addr
15 Addr
16 Addr
Enter the ship-to address of the vendor.
Only the information in the first two fields will print on the purchase
orders. The information entered in the last two fields is for internal
reference only.
17 City
Enter the name of city.
State
Enter a valid State Code, defined in the System Code Master File
(SYCD) - Record Type ST.
Press SKIP to leave this field blank.
FPD/203 PO - 169
SHIP FROM MAINTENANCE (PO/POM/SFM)
![Page 170: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
18 Zip
Enter the zip code. Do not enter the dash. The system does this
automatically.
Country
Enter a valid Country Code, defined in the System Code Master File
(SYCD) - Record Type CT.
Press SKIP to leave this field blank.
19 Remarks
Enter any remarks/comments you want to record for this ship-from
address or leave this field blank and press SKIP.
32 Phone1
Enter the primary phone number, including the dashes (for example,
619-555-1212).
33 Phone2
Enter the alternate phone number, including the dashes (for example,
619-555-1212).
34 Contact
Enter the name of your contact.
35 Fax
Enter the fax number, including the dashes (for example, 619-555-1212).
36 Fob
This entry must be a valid Fob Code from the System Code Master File
(SYCD). You can access the list of valid Fob Codes by using the Look
Up function.
Press CMD-L (Look Up). Once the list is displayed, use the arrow keys
to move up and down the list.
Press RETURN to accept the highlighted Fob Code.
Press SKIP to leave this field blank.
Error Message:
Invalid Code
The entered code is not in the System Code Master File (SYCD).
Enter a valid Fob Code, select from a list by pressing CMD-L, or
press SKIP to leave this field blank.
PO - 170 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 171: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
37 Ship Via
The Ship Via code defines the method of shipping. This entry must be a
valid Ship Via Code from the System Code Master File (SYCD).
You can access the list of valid Ship Via Codes by using the Look Up
function.
Press CMD-L (Look Up). Once the list is displayed, use the arrow keys
to move up and down the list.
Press RETURN to accept the highlighted Ship Via Code.
Press SKIP to leave this field blank.
Error Message:
Invalid Code
The entered code is not in the System Code Master File (SYCD).
Enter a valid Ship Via Code, select from a list by pressing CMD-L,
or press SKIP to leave this field blank.
38 Frt Chgd
Y = Freight is to be charged for this vendor.
Null or spaces mean N.
This is the default for each line entered on a PO or WIP order, and can be
changed.
If this field is blank, the flag set in AP/MAR/VM will be used.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field entry you want to change. You can
only change the Ship From information (in the lower half of the screen).
The fields in the upper half of the screen cannot be modified.
To delete the displayed ship-from information, enter DE.
To exit the program, press CMD. You can select to quit with or without
updating the new or modified information.
FPD/203 PO - 171
SHIP FROM MAINTENANCE (PO/POM/SFM)
![Page 172: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen Two
Field Explanations
DOCUMENT
The types of FASPAC documents that can be faxed: purchase orders,
blanket purchase orders, and vendor requisitions.
The following fields apply to each of these documents.
CONTACT/E-MAIL
Enter the default name that will be used in the Attention field on the
document and cover sheet.
Enter the default E-Mail address that will be used for the document.
Note: You may need additional configuration to set up your E-Mail
system to use this feature.
FAX NUMBER
Enter the default fax number for the document.
OUTPUT TYPE
Enter from one to five output types for each document.
F = Form
P = Plain Paper
X = Fax
M = Mailer
E = E-Mail
PO - 172 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 173: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
Ship From Listing (PO/POM/SFL)
The Ship From Listing program prints a list of Ship From Records for all or a
range of vendors. The Ship From Listing can be printed in vendor number or
shortname sequence.
The information printed for each vendor includes: the Vendor Code and the name
and address information entered in Vendor Maintenance (PO/VM,
AP/MAR/VM) and each Ship From Record in the Ship From File
(PO/POM/SFM).
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Print For All Vendors? (Y/N)
Y = Print the Ship From Listing for all vendors in the Vendor Master
File.
N = Specify a range of vendors for whom to print the Ship From Listing.
Print in Number or Shortname Sequence? (N/S)
Select the sequence in which to print the listing.
N = Print the Ship From Listing in vendor number sequence.
S = Print the Ship From Listing in vendor shortname sequence.
FPD/203 PO - 173
SHIP FROM LISTING (PO/POM/SFL)
![Page 174: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
From Number/ Shortname
Thru Number/Shortname
These fields are displayed only if you entered N in the Print For All
Vendors field.
Enter the range of vendor numbers or shortnames (depending on the print
option selected) to include on the Ship From Listing.
To print the listing for one vendor only, enter the same characters in both
fields.
Do You Want To Continue? (Y/N)
Y = Print the Ship From Listing as specified.
N = Exit the program without printing the Ship From Listing.
Sample Report
PO - 174 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
COMPANY: 10 BEST FASTENERS, INC. PAGE 1
RUN ID: SFL VENDOR SHIP-FROM LISTING 07/25/96
RUN BY: WPD 16:41:49 03/25/97
VEND NAME ADDRESS 1 ADDRESS 2 FOB
SHIP PHONE 1 PHONE 2 ADDRESS 3 ADDRESS 4 SHIP VIA
CONTACT FAX CITY ST ZIP COUNTRY REMARKS
================================================================================================================================
SP SIERRA PACIFIC SUPPLY CO. 1801 WEST EL SEGUNDO BLVD. S SHIPPING POINT
213-636-2431 310-638-9318 U UPS
LES 310-638-8105 COMPTON CA 90222 ORDERS WILL GO ON HOLD AT 45 DAYS
A&J A & J FORKLIFT & EQUIPMENT BROKERS 11425 WOODSIDE AVENUE, STE B
619-562-6862
562-4054 SANTEE CA 92071-4725
ADP AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING DEPT 701
714-228-4051
RITA RIGGS DENVER CO 80271-0701 USA 00070-703197
ALL ALL ELECTRONICS HARDWARE, INC. 90 NORTH LIVELY BLVD S SHIPPING POINT
800-778-7234 708-290-1757 U UPS
TED 800-832-9234 ELK GROVE VILL IL 60007-1317
B&B B & B SPECIALTIES, INC 4321 E. LA PALMA AVENUE S SHIPPING POINT
714-993-1600 U UPS
714-993-0119 ANAHEIM CA 92807-1887 ACCOUNTING FAX 714/993-7607
B&G B & G MANUFACTURING COMPANY P.O. BOX 8500 S-1865 S SHIPPING POINT
800-456-6870 T TRUCK LINE
JEAN/EMILY 503-286-1629 PHILADELPHIA PA 19178 MOST ORDERS THROUGH PORTLAND OREGON
B&G B & G MANUFACTURING COMPANY S SHIPPING POINT
01 800-456-6870 T TRUCK LINE
JEAN/EMILY 503-286-1629 PORTLAND OR USA
B&G B & G MANUFACTURING COMPANY 3067 UNIONVILLE PIKE S SHIPPING POINT
02 215-822-1925 T TRUCK LINE
215-822-1006 HATFIELD PA 19440 USA
BEK LEVEL 1 FASTENERS 300 THIRD AVENUE S SHIPPING POINT
304-697-2323 304-697-2326 U UPS
HUNTINGTON WV 25701 USA
DIX DIX INDUSTRIES, INC. 2720 N. ONTARIO STREET S SHIPPING POINT
818-848-7211 U UPS
818-848-2967 BURBANK CA 91504 USA
DMV DEPARTMENT OF MOTOR VEHICLE RENEWAL P. O. BOX 942894
SACRAMENTO CA 94294-0300
EDD STATE OF CALIFORNIA
![Page 175: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
Warehouse Address Maintenance (PO/POM/WAM)
Use this program to add, modify, and delete your Warehouse records. Because
other FASPAC programs use the Warehouse records, the information must be
correct.
Before using this program, each warehouse number must first be identified in
System Code Maintenance as Record Type WH.
If the System file (SYS/POS) is flagged to use the warehouse address, the
address in the Warehouse file prints on purchase orders. The System Master file
can also be flagged to print your company address or no address at all. See the
System Maintenance Reference Manual in Volume 5 for more information.
If you are setting up a new warehouse, first specify the warehouse number in
SYCD. Then use the Warehouse Address Maintenance program to record the
information specific to the warehouse. Finally, use the Warehouse Control
Specifications (SYS/WCS) program to specify the options that you want to apply
to the warehouse.
You can choose a Pick List Printer per warehouse, printing either directly to a
printer, spooling the print job, or printing to a file. This allows you to send each
Pick List order to the proper warehouse printer, allowing you to print at multiple
warehouses simultaneously.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
FPD/203 PO - 175
WAREHOUSE ADDRESS MAINTENANCE (PO/POM/WAM)
![Page 176: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
Field Explanation
Whse No
Enter the warehouse number to add, modify, or delete.
If you enter a warehouse number that has an existing record on file, the
appropriate information is displayed and the cursor moves directly to the
SELECT field. If the warehouse number does not have a record on file,
the cursor moves through each of the following fields so that the correct
information can be entered.
Note: If a warehouse number is entered and the cursor does not move
from this field, the number has not been set up in SYCD.
Do You Want To Create A New Warehouse? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if the warehouse number entered is not on
file.
Y = Set up the entered number as a valid warehouse number.
N = Return the cursor to the Whse No field.
01 Whse Name
Enter the name of the warehouse.
02 Address 1 to
05 Address 4
Only the information entered in the first two Address fields (Address 1
and Address 2) print. The information entered in the last two fields is for
internal reference only.
06 City
Enter the city.
State
Enter a valid State Code, defined in the System Code Master File
(SYCD) - Record Type ST.
08 Zip Code
Enter the zip code. Do not enter the dash.
09 Phone
Enter the phone number.
10 Fax
Enter the fax number.
PO - 176 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 177: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
10 Fax
Enter the fax number.
11 FF Vend No.
This field is no longer used.
The following fields are used in the UPS Manifest System programs
(UPS) and can be left blank if these programs are not used.
13 UPS Number
Enter the shipper number used in this warehouse.
14 GroundSaver
Y = This warehouse uses the Ground Saver Rates.
15 Use Mdse Amt
Y = The merchandise amount prints on the manifest instead of the
declared value. Printing the merchandise amount is used to show the
difference between the COD total and the actual amount of the
merchandise.
16 Update Cust Ord
Y = Freight charges are updated to customer orders.
T = Freight charges are updated only if the Freight Code is flagged to do
so (in the System Code File).
N = Freight charges are not updated to customer orders.
17 Handling Charge
The amount entered in this field (up to 99.99) is automatically added to
the freight charges on an order.
28 City Code
Enter a valid City Code defined in the System Code Master File (SYCD)
- Record Type CI. This entry is used to calculate tax on counter sales
orders (CSS).
Press SKIP to leave this field blank.
29 County Code
Enter a valid County Code defined in the System Code Master File
(SYCD) – Record Type CT. This entry is used to calculate tax on counter
sales orders (CSS).
Press SKIP to leave this field blank.
FPD/203 PO - 177
WAREHOUSE ADDRESS MAINTENANCE (PO/POM/WAM)
![Page 178: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
30 Pick List Prt Spool?
Enter a printer name up to eight characters, starting with pr, mu, tp, al, tt,
or lp. Then enter Y or N in the Spool field.
If you are printing to a network printer, enter N in the Spool field.
To print to a file, enter the file name and N in the Spool field.
To print to the standard default printer, leave these fields blank.
33 Label Format
001 = 3” length x 5” width.
002 = 1 1/2” length x 5” width
34 Print Weight
Y = Print the weight on shipping label.
N = Do not print the weight on shipping label.
35 Print Charges
Y = Print the total charges on shipping label.
N = Do not print the total charges on shipping label.
36 Allow CWT
Y = This warehouse uses the UPS hundred weight service.
N = This warehouse does not use the UPS hundred weight service.
37 Other Carrier
Y = This warehouse uses other carriers besides UPS.
N = This warehouse does not use other carriers.
Note: If N is entered in this field the “Other Carrier” questions will not
be asked when using the UPS Manifest system.
38 Whse Trf Multiplier
Use this multiplier to make sure a transfer order entered in Warehouse
Transfers Entry (WIP/WHT/ETW) does not reduce the quantity on-hand
below the preset mininum quantity in stock.
The system multiplies this value and the preset minimum quantity from
the Warehouse record. Then it subtracts the number from the total
quantity available to arrive at a transfer quantity allowed.
For example:
Total Quantity Available = 500
Multiplier of 1.1 x Preset Minimum of 100 = 110
Transfer Quantity Allowed = 390
PO - 178 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 179: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
If you enter a transfer order (400) that is greater than the transfer quantity
allowed (390), the following message is displayed:
The available quantity will drop below minimum. Is
this OK? (Y/N)
You can enter N and re-enter the quantity, or enter Y and continue
creating the transfer order.
If your security restricts you to a certain warehouse and a multiplier is
used, you can only enter or override transfer orders originating from your
warehouse.
SELECT
Enter the line number of the field entry to change.
To accept the entries as displayed, leave this field blank and press SKIP.
The cursor returns to the Whse No field. At this point you may enter
another warehouse number or press SKIP again to exit the program
completely.
To delete the displayed warehouse from the file, enter DE.
You Are About To DELETE Whse Address. Are You Sure? (Y/N)
This field is displayed only if you select to delete the displayed
warehouse from the file.
Y = Delete the displayed warehouse from the file.
N = Return the cursor to the SELECT field without deleting the
displayed warehouse.
FPD/203 PO - 179
WAREHOUSE ADDRESS MAINTENANCE (PO/POM/WAM)
![Page 180: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
Warehouse Address Inquiry (PO/POM/WAQ)
The Warehouse Address Inquiry program is used to display Warehouse Address
Records.
The fields in the Inquiry program are identical to those in Warehouse Address
Maintenance program (PO/POM/WAM). Please see that section of the manual
for detailed information.
Note: The Inquiry program allows access to Warehouse Address Records for
display purposes only. You cannot edit or delete Warehouse Address Records
through this program.
Entry/Inquiry Screen
PO - 180 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 181: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
Cancel (PO/POM/CAN)
The Purchase Order Cancel program is used to cancel open purchase orders on
which there is an on-order balance remaining on one or more lines. To cancel an
individual line for which receiving has not begun, use the Purchase Order Line
Maintenance program (PO/PL). To cancel the remaining on-order quantity for an
individual line on which receiving has begun, use the Receiving With a Purchase
Order program (REC/RPQ) to receive a zero quantity and backorder a zero
quantity. To delete completed purchase orders, use the Purchase Order Delete
program (PO/POD).
The purchase order to be cancelled is displayed first, giving you the opportunity
to make certain you want to cancel it. You are given the option of exiting this
program without canceling the purchase order.
A cancelled purchase order is removed from the Purchase Order file and from the
Purchase Order Detail File and is no longer available to be printed (PO/PP),
displayed (PO/INQ), or listed (PO/LIS). The Status 1 Tag Records of a cancelled
purchase order are deleted from the Tag File and the on-order quantities in the
Inventory File (IM/MAI) are adjusted. Status 2 and 3 Tag Records are not
affected. Refer to the Tagging System (TAG) section of the manual for
information regarding Tag Records.
If the Header of the purchase order you are canceling contains a Currency Code,
the purchase order displays in foreign and domestic currencies. The Currency
Code and it’s description display.
If an error occurs during the cancellation of a purchase order, an error message
will display. Only the lines up to the line on which the error occurred are
cancelled. The line on which the error occurred and the following lines are not
cancelled. You must correct the error and run the Purchase Order Cancel
program again to complete the process.
FPD/203 PO - 181
CANCEL (PO/POM/CAN)
![Page 182: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
P.O.
Enter the purchase order number to cancel. Once a valid purchase order
is entered in this field, the line item information is displayed and the
cursor moves to the bottom of the screen.
Error Messages:
Closed Status
All lines on the purchase order number are completed; there is NO
quantity remaining on order. This purchase order will be deleted
when the Purchase Order Delete program (PO/POD) is run.
Press RETURN and begin again or exit.
No Record Exists For This P. O. Number
The purchase order number entered is not an open purchase order.
Press RETURN and begin again or exit the program.
M = More Lines
This field is displayed only if all the lines for the specified purchase
order could not be displayed on one screen.
M = View more line items on this purchase orde.
PO - 182 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 183: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
X = Cancel Order
X = Cancel this purchase order.
To return to the P.O. field without canceling this purchase order, leave
this field blank and press SKIP.
Are You Sure You Want To Cancel This P.O.? (Y/N)
Y = Cancel this purchase order.
N = Return to the P.O. field without canceling this purchase order.
Note: A cancelled purchase order is no longer available to be printed,
displayed, or listed. Status 1 Tag Records are deleted and on order
quantities are adjusted in IM/MAI.
Error Messages:
Entire P.O. Has Not Been Deleted. Errors Must be Corrected.
This message is a reminder that an error occurred and the purchase
order has not been cancelled. All lines up to the line on which the
error occurred were deleted; the line on which the error occurred
AND the following lines were not deleted.
Press RETURN and exit this program. Correct the error and cancel
the purchase order again to complete the process.
Item Not in Inventory Master File_______
The item number has been deleted.
Press RETURN. Recreate the Item in the Inventory File (IM/MAI).
Create a Status 1 Tag Record through the Tag Maintenance program
(TAG/MAI) if necessary [check the Buying History File (IM/BHM)
first]. You MUST cancel the purchase order again to complete the
process.
Item Not In Inventory Warehouse File ________
The Item Warehouse Record was deleted. Recreate the Item
Warehouse Record in the Inventory File (IM/MAI). Create a Status 1
Tag Record through the Tag Maintenance program (TAG/MAI) if
necessary [check the Buying History File (IM/BHM) first]. You
MUST cancel the purchase order again to complete the process.
No Open Tag Record Found For This Item______-
The Tag Record was deleted. Create a Status 1 Tag Record through
the Tag Maintenance program (TAG/MAI). You must cancel this
purchase order again to complete the process.
FPD/203 PO - 183
CANCEL (PO/POM/CAN)
![Page 184: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
The following fields are updated by the system and cannot be
changed.
Whse
The warehouse number in which items on the specified POwere ordered.
Vendor
The vendor from which items on the specified PO were ordered.
P. O. Date
The order date of the specified purchase order.
Due
The due date of the specified purchase order.
Open
The total value remaining open on this purchase order.
Rec’d
The total value of items received on this purchase order.
Ln
Each purchase order line number.
Item
Each item and all notes.
UM
The unit of measure of each line item.
Cost
Each item’s cost per unit of measure.
Balance
The quantity remaining on order is displayed for each item.
Comment
The comment entered for each item.
PO - 184 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 185: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
Delete (PO/POM/POD)
The Purchase Order Delete program is used to delete completed (closed)
purchase orders or completed lines on purchase orders.
To cancel an individual line on which receiving has not begun, use the Purchase
Order Line Maintenance program (PO/PL). To cancel the remaining on-order
quantity for a line on which receiving has begun, use the Receiving With a
Purchase Order program (REC/RPQ) to receive a zero quantity and backorder a
zero quantity. To cancel an open purchase order, use the Purchase Order Cancel
program (PO/POM/CAN).
When using this program to delete completed purchase orders, a purchase order
is deleted only if it falls within the Order Date and Receiving parameters and:
• the Status of the purchase order is CLOSED.
• all lines on the purchase order are completed (regardless of Status).
When using this program to delete completed line items on a purchase order,
individual lines are deleted only if they fall within the Order Date and Received
parameters and:
• the line has either a zero balance (total was received) or a negative balance
(ordered quantity was over-received).
When deleting complete purchase orders, all lines on the closed purchase order
are deleted from the Purchase Order Detail File and the header information is
deleted from the Purchase Order file. If you are deleting completed lines, the
lines are deleted from the Purchase Order Detail File. If all lines on a purchase
are deleted (because they are all completed), the header information is also
deleted from the Purchase Order file.
Deleted lines/purchase orders are no longer available to be printed (PO/PP),
displayed (PO/INQ), or listed (PO/LIST). Tag Records are not affected.
The Purchase Order Delete program (PO/POM/POD) generates a report listing
all items deleted from the Purchase Order Detail File.
FPD/203 PO - 185
DELETE (PO/POM/POD)
![Page 186: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Delete Open PO’s With No Detail Prior To
The date one month prior to the sign on date is displayed. Press
RETURN to accept this date or enter another date using the MMDDYY
or MMDDYYYY format. Only those purchase orders that do not have a
Detail Record with a date prior to the date entered in this field are
considered to be deleted.
To delete purchase orders without regard for the Detail Record date,
press SKIP while the cursor is on the first character.
Delete PO’s Only If Prior To Order Date
The date one month prior to the sign on date is displayed. Press
RETURN to accept this date or enter another date using the MMDDYY
or MMDDYYYY format. Only those purchase orders that have an order
date that is prior to the date entered in this field are considered to be
deleted.
Delete Only PO’s Prior To Received Date
The date one month prior to the sign on date is displayed. Press
RETURN to accept this date or enter another date using the MMDDYY
or MMDDYYYY format. Only those purchase orders that have a
received date that is prior to the date entered in this field are considered
to be deleted.
PO - 186 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 187: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
Delete Non-Inventoried Item if Received Date Blank (Y/N)?
Y = Delete purchase orders that have non-inventoried items without a
received date.
Delete Only PO’s That Are Complete? (Y/N)
Y = Delete only those purchase orders for which all lines are closed.
N = Delete the zero balance lines on the selected purchase orders.
Note: If you select to delete the zero balance lines on the purchase
orders, and all lines on a purchase order are deleted (because they are all
complete), the header information is also deleted form the Purchase
Order file.
Continue? (Y/N)
Y = Delete the specified zero balance lines and/or purchase orders, and
print a report listing all items deleted from the Purchase Order Detail file.
N = Exit the program without deleting any zero balance lines and/or
purchase orders.
FPD/203 PO - 187
DELETE (PO/POM/POD)
![Page 188: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
Vendor Rating Report (PO/POM/VRR)
The Vendor Rating Report program produces a report listing the percent of
rejected shipments, late shipments, early shipments, and on-time shipments
received from each of your vendors. Based on a scale you determine, each
vendor receives a rating. The program must be run for each vendor individually.
The reports generated from this program are useful in determining which vendors
are and are not giving you satisfactory service.
The Vendor Rating Report accesses the Tag Records (Buying History) and runs
the report based on the following specifications:
• Check only the Tags received and originally scheduled within the time
period specified in the From and Thru Date fields.
• Status of the Tag must be a 2 (received and on-hand balance) or 3 (History
Record).
Entry/Inquiry Screen
Field Explanation
Whse
Enter the warehouse number from which to access the Vendor and Tag
Files.
To include Vendor and Tag Files from all warehouses, leave this field
blank and press SKIP.
To exit the program, press CMD-Q.
PO - 188 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 189: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
Error Message:
Invalid Warehouse Number . . . SKIP
The warehouse number entered is not a valid system warehouse.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
For Vendor
Enter the number of the vendor for which to run the report. You can
access the Vendor file by entering the first character of the vendor name
or number, and pressing the appropriate function key (F1 to access the
file based on the vendor number, F2 to access the file based on the
vendor name). Once a valid vendor is displayed, use F3 to scroll forward
and F4 to scroll back through the list. To accept the displayed vendor,
press RETURN.
Error Message:
Invalid Entry, Function, Or End Of File. . . SKIP
Either an invalid Vendor Number was entered, the wrong function
key was pressed, or the end of the file was reached while scrolling
through the list.
Press SKIP to acknowledge this message and begin again.
From Date
Thru Date
Enter the date range to include on this report. Each date must be entered
in the valid MMDDYY or MMDDYYYY format.
When the system accesses the Tag File, only those Tags that were
received and originally scheduled during the date range specified in these
fields will be included for calculation.
To include all Tag Records (received orders), regardless of the date,
leave each field blank and press SKIP (00/00/00 and 99/99/99 displays).
Tag Condition Code For Rejected Receipts
Only Tags with the Lot/Tag Condition Code entered in this field are
considered a rejected receipt. You can enter a valid code defined in the
System Code Master File (SYCD) or enter an asterisk (*) as one of the
two characters. An asterisk acts as a wild card and allows you to consider
more than just one Condition Code. See the examples below:
A* = All Tag Condition Codes beginning with A (or any character
designated) will be considered a rejected receipt.
*P = All Tag Condition Codes ending with P (or any character
designated) will be considered a rejected receipt.
CC = Only Tags with a Condition Code CC are considered as a rejected
receipt.
FPD/203 PO - 189
VENDOR RATING REPORT (PO/POM/VRR)
![Page 190: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
Number of Days Considered as Too Early
Enter the number of days a Tag must be early in order to be considered
too early. This number is then used to figure the percent of early tags:
Total number of days early/total received x 100 = %
Number of Days Considered as Not Late
Enter the number of days a Tag can be late before it is actually
considered late. This number is then used to figure the percent of late
tags:
Total number of days late/total received x 100 = %
The following fields allow you to determine the grading scale, based
on which the vendor receives a rating.
% Rejections less than ___ Rating of ____
Specify each rejection percent and a corresponding rating. The entries
must be made from lowest to highest. For example:
% Rating
30 F
50 D
75 C
92 B
100 A
The vendor’s rejection percent is figured as:
(total late + total early + total rejected) / total received x 100 = %
If the calculated % = 80%, which is <92 but >75, the rating is B.
If the calculated % had been greater than the last entry in the table, ????
would have printed as the rating. For example, if 100 had not been
entered and the calculated % was 95, a rating of ???? would have printed.
After you have finished making entries in the table, press SKIP.
Continue? (Y/N)
Y = Print the Vendor Ranking Report for the specified vendor, using the
rating table displayed.
N = Exit the program without printing the Vendor Ranking Report for
the specified vendor.
PO - 190 FPD/203
MISCELLANEOUS (POM)
![Page 191: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
Sample Report
FPD/203 PO - 191
VENDOR RATING REPORT (PO/POM/VRR)
COMPANY: 10 BEST FASTENERS, INC. PAGE 1
RUN ID: TGVRR VENDOR RATING REPORT 07/25/96
RUN BY: WPD 16:42:35 03/25/97
FOR VENDOR: BOLTS BOLTS & NUTS INC. From 00/00/00 Thru 99/99/99
P.O. No Date Due Date Rec Tags Received Tags Rejected
================================================================================================================================
005813 04/24/96 04/24/96 1 0
A04328 07/25/96 07/25/96 1 0
B000H1 07/13/96 07/13/96 4 0
B00WH8 07/14/96 07/14/96 1 0
Totals/Rejection Percent 7 0
Tags Late 0 0%
Tags Early 0 0%
Tags On Time 7 100% (Not Included In Rating)
VENDOR RATING: ????? 100 %
END OF REPORT
![Page 192: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
Automated Replenishment
The Automated Replenishment function allows you to create and process
automatic replenishment orders based on vendor requirements. You can define
rules for when to order, how much, who to order from, order size (free freight,
vendor minimum), packaging, price, and confidence level.
We recommend that you have a clear understanding of the Time-Phased
Inventory Management (TPIM) module. It is used to determine when to place
replenishment orders. Historical usage, lead times, review cycles, and future
demand are analyzed using TPIM saved procedures to determine replenishment
requirements.
The replenishment process will create a firm purchase order, purchase order for
review, or requisition, depending on your confidence level with the vendor.
Getting Started
Here are the steps for setting up your system and automatically creating
replenishment orders.
1. The following information must be entered in the system before you can
use Automated Replenishment.
a) Warehouse Control Specifications (SYS/WCS)—Turn on the
Automated Replenishment feature for each warehouse.
b) Purchase Product Line Maintenance (IM/PPLM)—If applicable,
define your product lines. This is an optional step.
c) Vendor Maintenance (AP/MAR/VM)—Add additional information
necessary for your vendors to be used in Automated Replenishment.
d) Inventory Maintenance (IM/MAI) or Branch Warehouse
Maintenance (IM/BRM)—Add additional information necessary for
each Item Master or Item Warehouse record to be used in Automated
Replenishment.
e) Vendor Contract Maintenance (PUR/VCC/VCM) or Vendor Price
Catalog Maintenance (PUR/VCC/VPCM)—Create vendor price
contracts or price catalogs. They are used to determine the price and
quantity for replenishment orders. (Optional)
f) Replenishment Definition (INV/AUR/AURD)—Define the rules for
running the replenishment creation process. This definition process is
very similar to the TPIM definition process.
PO - 192 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 193: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
Note: You can also load initial data into the inventory files through
the Warehouse Item Maintenance (IC/WIM) program. Refer to the
Inventory Control Reference Manual in Volume 2.
2. Run the following programs on a regular basis to create and review the
automatic replenishments.
a) Replenishment Creation (INV/AUR/AURC)—Create the
replenishment orders and automatically release purchase orders. Run
this program at regular intervals; it overwrites the unused data from
any previous run for an item in a warehouse.
b) Replenishment Review (INV/AUR/AURR)—Review the the items
that were not automatically released in AURC. Then manually
release the replenishment orders.
3. Review the audit report that shows all replenishment activities.
4. Print and send the purchase orders and requisitions as you normally
would.
These programs are described in the following sections. For certain screens, only
those fields pertinent to Automated Replenishment are discussed in this manual.
Refer to their respective manuals for detailed information.
Foreign Currency
If the vendor is a foreign currency vendor, you must enter foreign currency
values in Vendor Contract Maintenance (PUR/VCC/VCM) or Vendor Price
Catalog Maintenance (PUR/VCC/VPCM), not domestic currency.
The foreign Currency code must be set up in SYCD with the Enter Using field
set to Foreign.
If the Currency code for the vendor changes, the following message will be
displayed:
Vendor Currency Does Not Match This Record
To resolve this, you must reenter the prices in the VCM or VPCM program and
resave the record (CMD+U).
FPD/203 PO - 193
FOREIGN CURRENCY
![Page 194: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
Setup Procedures
Warehouse Control Specifications (SYS/WCS)
Use screen three of this program to turn on Automated Replenishment for each
warehouse.
To turn on Automated Replenishment:
1. From any FASPAC menu, enter WCS to display the first Warehouse
Control Specifications screen.
2. Enter a warehouse.
3. Press F1 twice to display screen three.
4. In field 30, enter Y to allow automatic replenishment processes in
this warehouse.
5. In field 31, enter one of the following replenishment methods:
• EOQ = Economic Order Quantity.
• MAX = Up to the maximum order quantity, which is equal to the
maximum – current position.
• MAN = A manual order quantity is calculated as though you
selected MAX. The item will be reviewed and not allowed for
automatic release. You can override the automatic flag for a
specific item.
6. Press Return to save the values, and then press CMD to exit the
program.
PO - 194 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 195: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
Purchase Product Line Maintenance (IM/PPLM)
This is an optional program for creating and maintaining purchase Product Line
codes. These codes are necessary if a vendor requires items in different product
lines to be on separate purchase orders, or if you would like to segregate the
items into product line groups.
To create a new product line code:
1. From any FASPAC menu, enter PPLM. The cursor starts in the Product
Line field.
2. Enter the name of the product line (such as HEX CAPS). The following
message is displayed:
Product Line Not Found - NEW Record? (Y/N)
3. Enter Y to create a new one, or enter N to start over in the Product Line
field. The cursor moves to the Description field.
4. Enter a description of this product line. The cursor moves to the
SELECT prompt.
5. Press CMD or Skip. The cursor returns to the Product Line field.
6. Enter another product line, or press CMD or Skip to exit the program.
To delete a product line:
1. From any FASPAC menu, enter PPLM.
2. Enter the name of the product line. The cursor moves to the SELECT
prompt.
FPD/203 PO - 195
SETUP PROCEDURES
![Page 196: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
3. Enter DE. The following message is displayed:
Do You Want to Delete This Record? (Y/N)
4. Enter Y to delete the record, or N to start over in the Product Line field.
Note: Any item/vendor requirement records using this product line will
become invalid because this application does not check for usage in these
files.
PO - 196 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 197: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
Vendor Maintenance (AP/MAR/VM)
Use this program to add the additional information necessary for a vendor to be
used in Automated Replenishment.
On screen two, the following fields are important to Automated Replenishment:
• 14 Auto Release—Specify whether POs created by the Automatic PO
process are to be reviewed before being created for the vendor.
• 17 Mix Product Lines on PO—Specify whether purchase orders created
by the Automatic PO process can have multiple product lines.
If the vendor does not want multiple product lines on a PO, you must
specify minimum requirements by product line in the Vendor Order
Requirements Maintenance screen. If they do allow multiple product lines,
you can only specify requirements at the vendor level.
If you do not enter vendor requirements in the Vendor Order
Requirements Maintenace screen, the 07 Min Ord Amt field on VM screen
two will be used as the default value.
To add information for a vendor:
1. From any FASPAC menu, enter MAR/VM.
2. In the Vend field, enter the vendor number. The vendor information is
displayed and the cursor moves to the SELECT prompt.
3. Press F1 to display the second screen (PO Extension). The cursor starts
in the SELECT prompt.
FPD/203 PO - 197
SETUP PROCEDURES
![Page 198: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
4. Enter 14 to go to the 14 Auto Release field:
• Enter Y if POs created by the Automatic PO process do not need
to be reviewed and can be printed and sent to the vendor.
• Enter N if POs are to be reviewed before they can be printed.
The cursor returns to the SELECT prompt.
5. Enter 17 to go to the 17 Mix Product Lines on PO field:
• Enter Y if POs created by the Automatic PO process can have
multiple product lines on them. The minimum vendor
requirements on the new screen can only be added at the vendor
level for these types of vendors.
• Enter N if POs must be only one product line. The vendor
minimum requirements must be specified at the product line level
for these types of vendors.
The cursor returns to the SELECT prompt.
6. Press F8 to display the Vendor Order Requirements Maintenance screen.
Go to page 199.
If the 17 Mix Product Lines on PO field is blank, the following message
is displayed:
You Must Answer the Mix Product Line on PO
Question First - SKIP
7. Press Skip and enter Y or N in field 17.
PO - 198 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 199: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
Vendor Order Requirements Maintenance Screen
If the vendor does not want multiple product lines on a purchase order, you must
specify minimum requirements by product line in this screen. If they do allow
multiple product lines, you can only specify requirements at the vendor level.
Information entered in this screen includes qualifiers for minimum order
requirements and free freight requirements. The qualifiers can be monetary
amount, piece count, volume, or weight. If you enter more than one qualifier,
meeting only one of them satisfies the ordering requirement.
When the order is calculated to see if it meets the requirement, the values are
totaled for all lines in each category. If an item is encountered with no weight or
volume, the qualifier is void.
This screen is accessed from AP/MAR/VM (screen one or two).
To create a Requirements record if the vendor allows product lines to be
mixed on a PO:
The 17 Mix Product Lines on PO field on AP/MAR/VM screen two is set to Y.
1. Press F8 from the Vendor Maintenance screen. The following message is
displayed:
Requirements Record Not Found - NEW Record? (Y/N)
2. Enter Y to create a new Requirements record. The cursor moves to the
01 Minimum field in the Amount column.
If you enter N, the AP/MAR/VM screen is redisplayed and you can start
over.
FPD/203 PO - 199
SETUP PROCEDURES
![Page 200: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
3. Enter the minimum order amount, quantity, volume, and weight required
by the vendor to place a purchase order with that vendor.
Zero is not a valid minimum amount. The process will check all valid
values and if any of them are met the vendor requirement is satisfied.
4. In the 02 Free Freight field, enter the amount, quantity, volume, and
weight for free freight.
These amounts are used and displayed in the review process so you can
make a more informed decision about the order to be created. These
fields are not used by the Automated Replenishment process.
5. To add standard vendor notes for this record, press F6.
6. When finished, press Skip to save the record and return to the
AP/MAR/VM screen.
To create a Requirements record if the vendor does not allow product lines
to be mixed on a PO:
The Product Line field is only displayed if the 17 Mix Product Lines on PO field
on AP/MAR/VM screen two is set to N.
1. Press F8 from the Vendor Maintenance screen. The cursor starts in the
Product Line field.
2. Enter the product line, or press CMD+L and select one from the list of
codes that have been defined in INV/PPLM.
PO - 200 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 201: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
3. Enter the minimum order amount, quantity, volume, and weight required
by the vendor to place a purchase order with that vendor.
Zero is not a valid minimum amount. The process will check all valid
values and if any of them are met the vendor requirement is satisfied.
4. In the 02 Free Freight field, enter the amount, quantity, volume, and
weight for free freight.
These amounts are used and displayed in the review process so you can
make a more informed decision about the order to be created. These
fields are not used by the Automated Replenishment process.
5. To add standard vendor notes for this record, press F6.
6. When finished, press Skip to save the record and return to the
AP/MAR/VM screen.
FPD/203 PO - 201
SETUP PROCEDURES
![Page 202: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
Inventory Management (IM)
Use either Inventory Maintenance (IM/MAI) or Branch Warehouse Maintenance
(IM/BRM) to enter the necessary information for an item that is to be used in
Automated Replenishment.
• IM/MAI—Create, edit, and delete Item Master records for both
nomenclature and free-form items. Screens three and four have the same
information as the Branch Warehouse Maintenance (IM/BRM) program.
• IM/BRM—Create and edit Item Warehouse records for items with
existing Item Master records.
The following instructions apply to both programs.
To add Automated Replenishment information for an item:
1. Using IM/MAI:
a) From any FASPAC menu, enter IM/MAI. The cursor starts in the
Item field.
b) On screen one of Inventory Maintenance (IM/MAI), the following
fields are important to Automated Replenishment:
• 07 Vendor—This field is now validated. You may already have
invalid information in this field that will cause errors to occur
during the INV/AUR/AURC process. This field must now contain
a valid PO vendor or be left blank.
• 15 Weight and 19 Unit Volume—These fields are used when
requirements are validated during Automated Replenishment
calculations.
c) Enter the item and then enter W for Warehouse Maintenance. The
cursor starts in the Warehouse field.
2. Using BRM:
From any FASPAC menu, enter BRM. The cursor starts in the Whse
field.
PO - 202 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 203: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
3. Enter a warehouse or press Return to accept the default warehouse. The
inventory information for the item is displayed.
4. The following fields are important for Automated Replenishment:
• 01 Max Qty—The maximum quantity of this item you want to
have on hand.
• 02 Min Qty—The minimum quantity of this item you want to have
on hand.
• 03 Lead Time—The number of days it normally takes to receive
this item after a purchase order is placed.
• 10 Eoq Quantity—The quantity that is the most economical for
you to purchase this item.
5. Press F1 for the next screen. The cursor starts in the Select prompt.
FPD/203 PO - 203
SETUP PROCEDURES
![Page 204: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
The following fields are important for Automated Replenishment.
6. In the 06 Vendor field, enter a valid PO vendor or leave the field blank.
7. In the 07 Vendor Ship From field, enter a valid vendor ship-from
location or leave the field blank.
The vendor must have been specified at the warehouse level, and the
ship-from location must have been set up in PO/POM/SFM as a valid
location.
8. In the 08 Replenishment Source field, enter V for Vendor.
Although you can enter the other options (K, P, W, and M), they are not
currently used by Automated Replenishment.
9. In the 09 Reorder Method field, enter one of the following options:
• MAX = Order quantity = maximum – current position
• EOQ = Economic Order Quantity
• MAN = The item must be reviewed before it is released. The order
quantity is calculated as though you entered MAX.
• NO = This item is not to be considered in the Automated
Replenishment process.
10. In the 10 Purchase Product Line field, enter the name of the product line
created in INV/PPLM, or press CMD+L and select one from the list.
This is used for grouping the items into product lines. Some vendors
require separate purchase orders for different product lines.
11. When finished, press CMD+U to save the record and exit the program.
PO - 204 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 205: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
Vendor Catalogs and Contracts (VCC)
Use these programs to specify pricing information for the item from one or more
vendors.
• Vendor Contract (PUR/VCC/VCM)—A contract specifies the special
price that you have negotiated with the vendor.
There are two types of contract tables: one based on quantity breaks only,
and the other based on container UOM from the vendor.
• Price Catalog Maintenance (PUR/VCC/VPCM)—A catalog specifies the
general pricing that the vendor gives to everyone.
Both programs include information about the vendor at the warehouse or
company level for lead time, pricing, packaging, quantity rules, and vendor part
codes for a date range.
Note: Using these programs to specify pricing is optional. If you do not them, the
PO costs come from the Vendor Price tables or the List/Replacement numbers.
The following instructions apply to both programs.
To create a new contract or catalog based on quantity breaks:
1. From any FASPAC menu, enter VCM or VPCM. The following screen
is displayed and the cursor starts in the Whse field.
FPD/203 PO - 205
SETUP PROCEDURES
![Page 206: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
2. Enter the warehouse number or press Skip for all warehouses. The cursor
moves to the Vendor field.
3. Enter a valid PO vendor ID. The cursor moves to the Item Number field.
4. Enter or select a valid FASPAC item number.
The following message is displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Vendor Contract Not Found - NEW Record? (Y/N)
If multiple records exist for a vendor, they are displayed and you can
select the correct record. If you do not select a record, you are asked if
you want to add a new one.
If you enter an item that is not specified for this warehouse, the following
error message is displayed:
Warehouse 01 Not In Use For This Item..SKIP
5. Enter Y to create the new contract. The cursor moves to the 01 Vendor
Part field.
6. Enter the vendor’s part number or leave the field blank. This field is for
information only. The cursor moves to the 02 UPC Number field.
7. Enter the UPC number of the item or leave the field blank. This field is
for information only. The cursor moves to the 03 Price Type field.
8. Enter Q for quantity break pricing. The cursor moves to the 04 Lead
Time field.
The UOM field displays the unit of measure from the Item Master file. It
is for information only.
9. Enter the number of days it takes this vendor to supply the product, or
leave the field blank. This field is for information only. The cursor
moves to the 06 Start Date field.
Note: The lead time value comes from the Item Warehouse record.
10. Enter the date the information becomes valid. The cursor moves to the
07 End Date field.
If you change the start date, the following message is displayed:
Start Date Changed. Is This a New Record? (Y/N)
11. Enter the date the information becomes obsolete. The cursor moves to
the Quantity column.
Note: Multiple pricing records may be available during a given time
interval. The system will search for the lowest price and give you with
that information. Mixing price types from the same vendor during the
same time interval may not yield the desired results.
PO - 206 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 207: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
12. Enter the minimum number of units to get the quantity price break. The
cursor moves to the Price per X column (where X is the UOM).
This number represents the individual pieces required to get this pricing.
The other columns are not available for quantity break pricing.
13. Enter the price per FASPAC unit of measure displayed in the column
heading. The cursor moves to the Remarks column.
14. Enter any notes or leave the field blank. The cursor moves to the next
line.
15. Press Skip in the Qty field when you are finished entering the pricing
information.
16. Your screen will look similar to the following example.
Note: When you are entering or modifying a record, the first zero quantity entry
in the table indicates you are done with your entries. Any entries after the zero
will be discarded when the record is saved.
FPD/203 PO - 207
SETUP PROCEDURES
![Page 208: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
To create a new contract or catalog based on the vendor’s container UOM:
1. From any FASPAC menu, enter VCM or VPCM. The following screen
is displayed and the cursor starts in the Whse field.
2. Enter the warehouse number or press Skip for all warehouses. The cursor
moves to the Vendor field.
3. Enter a valid PO vendor ID. The cursor moves to the Item Number field.
4. Enter or select a valid FASPAC item number.
The following message is displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Vendor Contract Not Found - NEW Record? (Y/N)
If multiple records exist for a vendor, they are displayed and you can
select the correct record. If you do not select a record, you are asked if
you want to add a new one.
If you enter an item that is not specified for this warehouse, the following
error message is displayed:
Warehouse 01 Not In Use For This Item..SKIP
5. Enter Y to create the new contract. The cursor moves to the 01 Vendor
Part field.
6. Enter the vendor’s part number or leave the field blank. This field is for
information only. The cursor moves to the 02 UPC Number field.
7. Enter the UPC number of the item or leave the field blank. This field is
for information only. The cursor moves to the 03 Price Type field.
PO - 208 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 209: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
8. Enter C for container type pricing. The cursor moves to the 04 Lead
Time field.
The UOM field displays the unit of measure from the Item Master file. It
is for information only.
9. Enter the number of days it takes this vendor to supply the product, or
leave the field blank. This field is for information only. The cursor
moves to the 05 Package Rule field.
10. Enter the rounding rule for package quantities. The cursor moves to the
06 Start Date field.
Typically, the rounding rule is 0.5 or higher is rounded up to the next
whole number. This field allows you to enter any rule for rounding up.
The number you enter here represents the fraction (3=.3, 5=.5, etc.)
• 0 = Do not round up; always round down.
• 1 to 9 = The rule specifying the decimal fraction to round up.
For example, you enter 6 as the rule, a container contains 100 pieces, and
the requirement is for 65 pieces. The rounding rule of 6 will order 100
pieces, and the rule of 7 will not order the item.
11. Enter the date the information becomes valid. The cursor moves to the 07
End Date field.
If you change the start date, the following message is displayed:
Start Date Changed. Is This a New Record? (Y/N)
12. Enter the date the information becomes obsolete. The cursor moves to
the Quantity column.
Note: Multiple pricing records may be available during a given time
interval. The system will search for the lowest price and give you with
that information. Mixing price types from the same vendor during the
same time interval may not yield the desired results.
13. Enter the minimum number of units to get the container price break. The
cursor moves to the UOM column.
This number represents the individual pieces required to get this pricing.
14. Enter the vendor unit of measure to be placed on the purchase order.
• BX = Box
• CS = Case
• KG = Keg.
Do not use FASPAC values of C, M, or MM.
The cursor moves to the Container Type column.
FPD/203 PO - 209
SETUP PROCEDURES
![Page 210: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
15. Enter the type of container the vendor will use to supply the product.
This field is used for information only. The cursor moves to the Qty/Pkg
column.
Note: If the system flag for validating containers is turned on it, this
must be a valid TQ SYCD entry. Otherwise it can be any freeform value.
16. Enter the number of pieces in the specified container. The cursor moves
to the Price/Cont column.
17. Enter the price per container for the item from the vendor. The cursor
moves to the Remarks column.
18. Enter any notes or leave the field blank. The cursor moves to the next
line.
19. Press Skip in the Quantity field when you are finished entering the
pricing information.
Your screen will look similar to the following example.
Note: When you are entering or modifying a record, the first zero quantity entry
in the table indicates you are done with your entries. Any entries after the zero
will be discarded when the record is saved.
PO - 210 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 211: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
To delete a contract or catalog record:
1. From any FASPAC menu, enter VCM or VPCM.
2. Enter the Warehouse number, Vendor ID and Item number. The cursor
moves to the Select prompt.
3. Enter DE. The following message is displayed:
Do You Want to Delete This Record? (Y/N)
4. Enter Y to delete the record, or N to start over in the Product Line field.
5. Press CMD or Skip. The cursor returns to the Vendor field.
6. Enter another Vendor and Item number, or press CMD or Skip to exit
the program.
FPD/203 PO - 211
SETUP PROCEDURES
![Page 212: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
Determining When to Order
The TPIM module is the basis for determining when to place automatic
replenishment orders. It allows you to set up inventory review criteria based on
inflows and outflows during a time window.
There are several screens of questions that define how the inventory position will
be evaluated by AURC. Your responses can be saved for future or repetitive use.
After the criteria is established, AURC reviews the inventory position of the
items requested. Those items whose inventory position during the time window
is low will be flagged for automatic replenishment.
The same concept is used for creating automated replenishment orders. These are
the programs you will use:
• Replenishment Definition (INV/AUR/AURD)—Create, maintain, and
save the responses from the TPIM questions.
• Replenishment Creation (INV/AUR/AURC)—Generate replenishment
orders from the saved procedures; if necessary, adjust the percentage
variance of the minimum. Automatically create purchase orders.
Replenishment orders that do not create purchase orders are saved in the
au01 file.
• Replenishment Review (INV/AUR/AURR)—Review replenishment
orders generated in AURC that did not automatically create purchase
orders. Perform further actions on them and then manually create purchase
orders and requisitions.
The flowchart on the next page illustrates the Automated Replenishment process.
Note: We recommend you have a good understanding of how TPIM works
before you attempt to use Automated Replenishment. Refer to the Time-Phased
Inventory Management Reference Manual in Volume 3.
PO - 212 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 213: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
FPD/203 PO - 213
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
AURC Automatic Purchasing Flowchart
Display
information
PO12
IM01
IM02
Direct Read
IM01 Key 1 =
Company
FASPAC Part
Direct Read
IM02 Key 1 =
Company
FASPAC Part
Warehouse
Read Item records
Supply
Source
"V"
Single
Source Item
Create
Reqisition
Record
TPIM
created
work file
records
Read next work
record
MFPP2
Validate Vendor
AP10
Direct Read
AP10 key =
Company
VendorVendor Valid
Error message on
audit report
Release PO
Create Purchase
Order Record
Flagged properly
PO01
PO03
Prompt User
Generate Adit
Report Entry
Allow modification
Cancelled
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
Error message on
audit report
Go to read next
work record
Do not process
Go to read next
work record
no
Go to read next
work record
yes
no
no Create audit
record
Go to read next
work record
Go to read next
work record
no
no
yes
Review
requirements
Review
requirements
![Page 214: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
Replenishment Definition (INV/AUR/AURD)
Use this program to create and maintain procedures that save the responses to
questions asked in TPIM for the Automated Replenishment process.
There are five screens in this program:
• Automatic Replenishment Procedures screen—A list of saved procedures
(unless this is the first time you are defining one).
• Replenishment Definition Item Selection Screen—The standard FASPAC
item selection screen. Refer to the Inventory Management Reports
Reference Manual in Volume 2 for more information.
• Replenishment Definition Inflows screen—Specify all sources from which
inventory is received into the warehouse, such as purchase orders,
warehouse transfers, material requisitions, rework orders, completed kits
and quotes.
• Replenishment Definition Outflows screen—Specify the sources of
demand for inventory items from the warehouse, such as customer orders,
warehouse transfers, rework orders, kits, EDI transaction types 862 and
830, kitting requirements, and plating and rework orders.
• Replenishment Definition Selection screen—Specify the filter information
for specific reporting requirements, such as the vendor number, product
line, from and through dates, replenishment type, and the percentage by
which to increase/decrease the minimum.
To define a procedure:
1. From any FASPAC menu, enter AURD. The cursor starts in the WHSE
field.
PO - 214 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 215: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
2. Enter a warehouse or press CMD to exit the program..
If definitions already exist, they are listed in the following screen.
If there are no existing definitions or if you select an existing procedure,
the following standard FASPAC item selection screen is displayed.
FPD/203 PO - 215
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 216: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
3. Enter the appropriate responses and then enter N at the Any Changes?
(Y/N) prompt.
The Inflows screen is displayed.
4. Specify all sources from which inventory is received, such as purchase
orders, warehouse transfers, material requisitions, rework orders,
completed kits and quotes.
Note: You can also press F8 to accept all entries on all screen, skip the
remaining screens, and create the procedure.
5. Press F10 to accept the entries and display the Outflows screen.
PO - 216 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 217: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
6. Specify the sources of demand for inventory items, such as customer
orders, warehouse transfers, rework orders, kits, EDI transaction types
862 and 830, kitting requirements, and plating and rework orders.
Note: You can also press F8 to accept all entries on all screen, skip the
remaining screens, and create the procedure.
7. Press F10 to accept the entries and display the Other Issues (Filters)
screen. The cursor starts in the Vendor Number field.
8. Press F10 to accept this screen’s default entries, or enter a valid PO
vendor, or leave the field blank for all vendors. The cursor moves to the
Product Line field.
9. Enter a valid product line or press Skip all product lines. The cursor
moves to the Due Date Type field.
10. Enter the type of due date to be used for replenishments created using
AURC.
• L = Today plus the number of lead time days
• B = When the product dips below the minimum
The cursor moves to the Buyer Code field.
11. Enter a Buyer code or press Skip for all Buyer codes. The cursor moves
to the From Date field.
FPD/203 PO - 217
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 218: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
12. Enter a date in MMDDYY OR MMDDYYYY format, or enter one of
the following variables.
• @SON = The sign on date of the user.
• @ILT = The sign on date plus lead time of the item at the item
warehouse level.
• @IRC = The sign on date plus the review cycle and lead time at
the item warehouse level.
• @ILTM999 = The sign on date plus the multiplier of the lead
time. For example, @ILTM2.5 represents the sign on date plus 2.5
times the lead time.
These variables are wild cards that allow you to run the process without
the need to change the date range. They are checked for obvious errors
when you enter the criteria. However, due to some of the calculations,
these values may not yield a valid date range at the time you run AURC.
The cursor moves to the Thru Date field.
Note: You cannot enter a wild card variable in one Date field and a date
in the other Date field. You must either use a wild card in both fields
(they can be different) or leave one of the fields blank.
13. Enter a date in MMDDYY OR MMDDYYYY format, or enter one of
the variables described in the previous step. The cursor moves to the
Replenishment Type(s) field.
The Warehouse field is skipped because it is not used in Automated
Replenishment.
14. Enter V for Vendor Purchase Order and press Skip. The cursor moves to
the first Percentage To Increase/Decrease By field.
Although you can enter one or more of the other options (K, P, W, and
M), they are not currently used by Automated Replenishment.
The following fields are skipped because they are not used in Automated
Replenishment. The responses are displayed for information purposes
only.
• Any Item Not Reviewed For 000 Days
• Ignore Minimum
• Ignore Maximum
• Percentage To Increase/Decrease By (for Maximum)
PO - 218 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 219: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
15. Enter a percentage if the current minimum value threshold should be
increased, decreased, or left as is.
• 0 = The current minimum value is to be used.
• n+ = Enter a number and the plus sign if the minimum value is to
be increased by that percent.
• n- = Enter a number and the minus sign if the minimum value is to
be decreased by that percent.
The following message is displayed:
Any Changes? (Y/N)
16. Enter Y if you want to change entries or N to continue. The following
message is displayed if you enter Y.
OK To Continue? (Y/N)
17. Enter Y to run the program or N to exit the program. The following
message is displayed if you enter Y.
Save Responses? (Y/N)
Enter Y to save the responses or N to exit the program. The following
message is displayed if you enter Y.
Enter Name
Note: You cannot delete saved procedures.
18. Enter a meaningful name or use the same name if the procedure already
exists.
The saved procedure will be available to everyone running the Automatic
Replenishment programs. The responses are stored by warehouse within
company instead of by user. This allows all people with access to that
company, warehouse, and application to have access to the procedures.
After you enter a name, the following message is displayed.
Would You Like to Run a Test? (Y/N)
19. Enter Y to run a test or N to exit the program.
Running the test allows you to see the items and what would be
generated for replenishment if this procedure is run in AURC. The test
does not erase the previous run of the same stored procedure, nor does it
create orders. It allows you to test scenarios.
FPD/203 PO - 219
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 220: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
The following message displayed at the bottom of the screen indicates
the number of items that would have been selected for replenishment.
20. Enter Y to display the AURD summary screen.
PO - 220 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 221: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
21. Enter the line number to display the AURD detail screen.
22. Enter N to exit the program.
FPD/203 PO - 221
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 222: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
Replenishment Creation (INV/AUR/AURC)
Use this program to generate replenishment orders from the saved procedures
you created in AURD. This program is similar to TPIM in that it reviews stock
levels of items in a time-phased manner.
If an item’s stock position goes negative during the review window or remains
below the minimum at the end of the time window being reviewed, a
replenishment order is generated. If the vendor is flagged for automatic release,
the program will automatically create one or more purchase orders, following this
sequence to find the pricing for the item:
• It checks the im02 file to see if a vendor is associated with the item (in
IM/MAI).
– If the im02 file has no vendor, it checks the im01 file.
– If there is no vendor, it creates a replenishment order to be reviewed in
AURR.
• If a vendor is found, it then checks for a vendor contract (defined in
VCC/VCM).
– It looks for the lowest price in a specific warehouse and will use that to
create the PO.
– If there is no specific warehouse, it looks for the lowest price for all
warehouses and uses that to create the PO.
• If there is no vendor contract, it checks for a vendor price catalog (defined
in VCC/VCPM).
– It looks for the lowest price in a specific warehouse and will use that to
create the PO.
– If there is no specific warehouse, it looks for the lowest price for all
warehouses and uses that to create the PO.
• If there is no vendor catalog, it looks at the Vendor record for a Vendor
Price code (field 30 Vendor Code in AP/MAR/VM).
– Then it looks in the Vendor Price Table for the code.
– If it finds the code, it creates a purchase order.
• If it does not find a Vendor Price code or if the code does not exist in the
Vendor Price Table, it looks at field 08 Default Purchase Cost in
SYS/POS.
– It uses either REP (replacement cost) or LIS (list price) to create the
purchase order.
An audit report is generated showing all errors and PO records that were created
for you to print and send.
PO - 222 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 223: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
Purchase orders are not be automatically created under the following conditions.
• If the replenishment order did not meet the vendor’s order requirements.
• If the item was flagged in IM/MAI or IM/BRM to be manually released
(see page 204).
• If there is no vendor assigned.
• If the vendor is not flagged in AP/MAR/VM for automatic release (see
page 197).
• If the item is below zero during the window under review, but is above the
minimum at the end of the window.
These replenishment orders are saved in the au01 file, which you can then review
in Replenishment Review (INV/AUR/AURR). See page 228.
FPD/203 PO - 223
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 224: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
To run a replenishment procedure:
1. From any FASPAC menu, enter AURC. The following screen is
displayed and the cursor starts in the WHSE field.
2. Enter a warehouse or press CMD to exit the program.
The list of saved procedures is displayed and the cursor moves to the
SELECT field.
PO - 224 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 225: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
3. Enter the number of the procedure you want to run.
The Replenishment Creation screen is displayed and the cursor starts in
the first Percentage To Increase/Decrease By field.
4. Enter a percentage if the current minimum value threshold should be
increased, decreased, or left as is.
• 0 = The current minimum value is to be used.
• n+ = Enter a number and the plus sign if the minimum value is to
be increased by that percent.
• n- = Enter a number and the minus sign if the minimum value is to
be decreased by that percent.
The following message is displayed:
Any Changes? (Y/N)
5. Enter Y to return to the Percentage To Increase/Decrease By field, or N
to continue. The following following message is displayed.
OK To Continue? (Y/N) is displayed.
FPD/203 PO - 225
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 226: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
6. Enter Y to run the prcedure, or N to exit the program.
Item records are processed and replenishment orders are created.
Statistics are displayed at the bottom of the screen when the process is
finished:
7. Press Skip to exit the program.
PO - 226 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 227: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
If the 02 Allow Entry Of P.O. Number field is set to Y in SYS/WCS screen two,
the following message is displayed when purchase orders are automatically
created:
xxxxxx
Enter New P.O. Number
Where xxxxxx is the system-defined PO number.
You can accept the system PO number or enter a different one.
FPD/203 PO - 227
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 228: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
Replenishment Review (INV/AUR/AURR)
Use this program to review replenishment orders that were generated in
Replenishment Creation (INV/AUR/AURC) but did not automatically create
purchase orders. You can edit them using a “drill down” method, and then
manually create the purchase orders and requisitions.
While reviewing the replenishment orders, you can make purchasing decisions
and flag items for replenishment, process the work, create purchase order and
requisition records, review the replenishment order later, or discard what was in
this session and try again. Note that the option to review later is only available
until the next time this application is run.
Once you manually flag an item to be ordered, the program creates purchase
orders and requisitions regardless of the vendor or minimum requirements from
the Automated Replenishment requirements. Those items with a vendor assigned
will create purchase orders and those without a vendor will create requisitions.
An audit report indicates the activities that occurred. Review the report and then
print and send the purchase orders and requisitions as you normally would.
Note: If you do not place the replenishment orders, your selections will be
retained for further review. This information is at the item/warehouse level for
the procedures. If another user runs a different procedure for the same item after
you have run your procedures, the item is no longer available for you to act on.
The item is available for review only in last procedure to run for that item.
To review a replenishment order:
1. From any FASPC menu, enter AURR. The following screen is displayed
and the cursor starts in the WHSE field.
PO - 228 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 229: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
2. Enter a warehouse or press CMD to exit the program. The list of saved
procedures is displayed and the cursor moves to the SELECT field.
3. Enter the number of the procedure. The Automatic Replenishment
Review Summary screen is displayed (go to the next section).
If the following error message is displayed, no replenishments have been
created from the procedure you selected.
No Records Found to Review SKIP to Exit
FPD/203 PO - 229
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 230: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
Automatic Replenishment Review Summary Screen
The summary screen displays the status of the replenishment orders by vendor
and product line. The vendor requirements are also displayed with the current
status to allow for quick decision processing.
You can drill down to the line item detail level and review the items, or process
the replenishment orders from this screen.
Column and Field Descriptions
No
The line number to access detail or select for replenishment.
O
The replenishment order status.
Y = All detail items have been selected for replenishment.
N = None of the detail lines have been selected.
P = Some have been selected and some not partially selected.
Vendor
The vendor to be used for replenishment. The field is blank if no vendor
is assigned to the item.
PO - 230 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 231: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
Ship
The vendor ship-from location.
Prod Line
The product line for the items.
Out
The number of detail lines in a negative position.
Total
The total number of detail lines.
Current
The current amount, quantity, volume, or weight based on items flagged
for replenishment.
Press F5 to toggle between these values.
Minimum
The corresponding minimum requirement of the vendor. This is
represented in amounts or percentages.
Press F7 to toggle between these values.
N/A is displayed when percentages are chosen that are not applicable in
this requirement.
Freight
The free freight information for the vendor. The information is displayed
in the same manner as the minimum column.
Functions
Enter a line number to display the detail screen (go to page 233).
F1 = If the items are on more than one screen, return to the top of the list.
F3 = If the items are on more than one screen, go to the next screen.
F5 = Toggle between displaying Amt, Vol, Qty, and Wgt in the Current,
Minimum, and Freight columns.
F7 = Toggle between displaying Amt, Vol, Qty, and Wgt or the percent
of each in the Minimum and Freight columns.
F10 = Asks for a Line Number to Order. If the ordered status is Y, all
detail lines will be flagged N and the status changed to N. If the status is
P or Y, all detail lines will be flagged Y and the status changed to Y.
FPD/203 PO - 231
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 232: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
CMD = Exit the program. If an item is flagged for replenishment, the
following message is displayed:
Would You Like to Generate Replenishment Orders
for Included Items Create Orders(Y/N)?
Enter Y to create purchase orders or requisitions.
Enter N to save changes and exit the program.
If the 02 Allow Entry Of P.O. Number field is set to Y in SYS/WCS screen two,
the following message is displayed when purchase orders are created:
xxxxxx
Enter New P.O. Number
Where xxxxxx is the system-defined PO number.
You can accept the system-generated PO number or enter a different one.
PO - 232 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 233: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
Automatic Replenishment Review Detail Screen
This screen is displayed when you enter a line number in the Summary screen.
Column and Field Descriptions
Vendor
The vendor being used for replenishment.
Ship
The vendor’s Ship From code.
Amount
The running total for the items you have selected for replenishment.
No
The line number to select for TPIM or replenishment. The following
indicators may be displayed.
* = The item was at a negative position at the end of the time window.
Items with this indicator are displayed at the top of the review list.
@ = The item fell into a negative position during the review window but
is not at a negative position at the end of the window. These items may
only need to be expedited, not ordered. They are displayed after the *
items in the review list.
Item Number/Desc
The first line displays the FASPAC item number.
The second line displays the item description.
FPD/203 PO - 233
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 234: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
Order Qty
The quantity to be ordered for replenishment after rounding/container
rules have been applied. You can accept this quantity or change it if
necessary.
Press CMD to return to the SELECT prompt without changing the field.
If you enter a zero quantity, the following message is displayed:
Invalid Quantity Entered SKIP-To Continue
After you enter a value in this field, the extended cost is recalculated and
displayed. The cursor moves to the Date/Sugg field.
UOM
The first line is the FASPAC or vendor’s unit of measure after
rounding/container rules have been applied.
The second line is the stocking unit of measure.
You cannot change either of these values.
Date/Sugg. Qty
The first line is the due date calculated for replenishment. You can
manually change it if necessary.
The second line is the quantity calculated for replenishment in stocking
units. You cannot change this value.
Press CMD to return to the Order Qty field.
If you enter an invalid date, the following error message is displayed:
Invalid Date Entered SKIP-To Continue
After you accept or enter a date, the cursor moves to the Cost field.
Cost/Ext
The first line is the unit cost per UOM. You can change this if necessary.
The second line is the extended cost, based on the order quantity, unit
cost, and UOM. It will be recalculated if you change the Order Quantity
or Cost; you cannot change this value manually.
Press CMD to return to the Date field.
If you change the cost, it should be based on the UOM displayed for that
line. The extended cost is recalculated and displayed.
After you accept or change the cost, the cursor moves to the O/C field.
Note: If no vendor is assigned, the values in the Cost/Ext column are not
used to create the requisition. You can use these values in a simulation to
project what amount would be generated if these items were order.
PO - 234 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT
![Page 235: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
O/C
The first line displays the item’s Order flag (Y if the item has been
flagged for replenishment, N if it has not) and ABC code.
The second line displays the item’s Class code.
Press CMD to return to the Cost field.
After you accept or change the Order flag, the Amount field at the top of
the screen is recalculated and displayed. The cursor returns to the
SELECT prompt and the file is updated with your changes.
Functions
Enter a line number to edit.
F1 = If the items are on more than one screen, return to the top of the list.
F3 = If the items are on more than one screen, go to the next screen.
F10 = Recalculates the Amount field at the top of this screen and on the
Summary screen.
F11 = Runs TPIM to display the information (all dates and processes)
about the item’s movements. See page 236.
CMD = Return to the Summary screen.
FPD/203 PO - 235
DETERMINING WHEN TO ORDER
![Page 236: Purchasing Reference Manual - · PDF fileBlanket P.O. Release Line Maintenance (PO/BPO/BPR). . . . . .....84 Blanket P.O. Cancel/Inquiry ... purchase order vendor often has more than](https://reader031.fdocuments.net/reader031/viewer/2022030419/5aa61e177f8b9afa758e1a34/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
Automatic Replenishment Review TPIM Detail Screen
This screen is displayed when you press F11 in the Automatic Replenishment
Review Detail screen.
You can evaluate the current status of the item by examining the time-phased
sequence of inflows and outflows and the net balance value after each
replenishment order.
The indicators * and @ to the right of a line item allow you to quickly ascertain
when the net balance value for the item is above the maximum control value,
within the maximum and minimum control limits, or below the minimum control
value.
• * means the net balance is above the maximum quantity.
• @ means the net balance is below the minimum quantity.
• If neither character is displayed, the net balance value is within the
minimum and maximum control limits.
Your replenishment review record is included in the time-phased sequence so
you can examine its effect. It has a T-S of ARR in the Inflows column.
Refer to the Time-Phased Inventory Management Reference Manual in Volume 3
for more information.
Press F9 to return to AURR.
PO - 236 FPD/203
AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT